cronolog-1.6.2/0000777000031100003110000000000007274470015007075 5cronolog-1.6.2/Makefile.in0000664000031100003110000002523507274470012011064 # Makefile.in generated automatically by automake 1.4 from Makefile.am # Copyright (C) 1994, 1995-8, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without # even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A # PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SHELL = @SHELL@ srcdir = @srcdir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ prefix = @prefix@ exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ bindir = @bindir@ sbindir = @sbindir@ libexecdir = @libexecdir@ datadir = @datadir@ sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ localstatedir = @localstatedir@ libdir = @libdir@ infodir = @infodir@ mandir = @mandir@ includedir = @includedir@ oldincludedir = /usr/include DESTDIR = pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ top_builddir = . ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ INSTALL = @INSTALL@ INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ $(AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS) INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ transform = @program_transform_name@ NORMAL_INSTALL = : PRE_INSTALL = : POST_INSTALL = : NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : PRE_UNINSTALL = : POST_UNINSTALL = : CC = @CC@ LN_S = @LN_S@ MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ PERL = @PERL@ RANLIB = @RANLIB@ VERSION = @VERSION@ AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = gnu dejagnu EXTRA_DIST = cronolog.spec SUBDIRS = lib src doc testsuite ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 mkinstalldirs = $(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = DIST_COMMON = README AUTHORS COPYING ChangeLog INSTALL Makefile.am \ Makefile.in NEWS TODO aclocal.m4 configure configure.in install-sh \ missing mkinstalldirs DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) TAR = gtar GZIP_ENV = --best EXPECT = expect RUNTEST = runtest all: all-redirect .SUFFIXES: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in: Makefile.am $(top_srcdir)/configure.in $(ACLOCAL_M4) cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu --include-deps Makefile Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status cd $(top_builddir) \ && CONFIG_FILES=$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status $(ACLOCAL_M4): configure.in cd $(srcdir) && $(ACLOCAL) config.status: $(srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) $(SHELL) ./config.status --recheck $(srcdir)/configure: $(srcdir)/configure.in $(ACLOCAL_M4) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) cd $(srcdir) && $(AUTOCONF) # This directory's subdirectories are mostly independent; you can cd # into them and run `make' without going through this Makefile. # To change the values of `make' variables: instead of editing Makefiles, # (1) if the variable is set in `config.status', edit `config.status' # (which will cause the Makefiles to be regenerated when you run `make'); # (2) otherwise, pass the desired values on the `make' command line. @SET_MAKE@ all-recursive install-data-recursive install-exec-recursive \ installdirs-recursive install-recursive uninstall-recursive \ check-recursive installcheck-recursive info-recursive dvi-recursive: @set fnord $(MAKEFLAGS); amf=$$2; \ dot_seen=no; \ target=`echo $@ | sed s/-recursive//`; \ list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ echo "Making $$target in $$subdir"; \ if test "$$subdir" = "."; then \ dot_seen=yes; \ local_target="$$target-am"; \ else \ local_target="$$target"; \ fi; \ (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) $$local_target) \ || case "$$amf" in *=*) exit 1;; *k*) fail=yes;; *) exit 1;; esac; \ done; \ if test "$$dot_seen" = "no"; then \ $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) "$$target-am" || exit 1; \ fi; test -z "$$fail" mostlyclean-recursive clean-recursive distclean-recursive \ maintainer-clean-recursive: @set fnord $(MAKEFLAGS); amf=$$2; \ dot_seen=no; \ rev=''; list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ rev="$$subdir $$rev"; \ test "$$subdir" = "." && dot_seen=yes; \ done; \ test "$$dot_seen" = "no" && rev=". $$rev"; \ target=`echo $@ | sed s/-recursive//`; \ for subdir in $$rev; do \ echo "Making $$target in $$subdir"; \ if test "$$subdir" = "."; then \ local_target="$$target-am"; \ else \ local_target="$$target"; \ fi; \ (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) $$local_target) \ || case "$$amf" in *=*) exit 1;; *k*) fail=yes;; *) exit 1;; esac; \ done && test -z "$$fail" tags-recursive: list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ test "$$subdir" = . || (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) tags); \ done tags: TAGS ID: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(LISP) list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do echo $$i; done | \ awk ' { files[$$0] = 1; } \ END { for (i in files) print i; }'`; \ here=`pwd` && cd $(srcdir) \ && mkid -f$$here/ID $$unique $(LISP) TAGS: tags-recursive $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) $(LISP) tags=; \ here=`pwd`; \ list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ test -f $$subdir/TAGS && tags="$$tags -i $$here/$$subdir/TAGS"; \ fi; \ done; \ list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do echo $$i; done | \ awk ' { files[$$0] = 1; } \ END { for (i in files) print i; }'`; \ test -z "$(ETAGS_ARGS)$$unique$(LISP)$$tags" \ || (cd $(srcdir) && etags $(ETAGS_ARGS) $$tags $$unique $(LISP) -o $$here/TAGS) mostlyclean-tags: clean-tags: distclean-tags: -rm -f TAGS ID maintainer-clean-tags: distdir = $(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION) top_distdir = $(distdir) # This target untars the dist file and tries a VPATH configuration. Then # it guarantees that the distribution is self-contained by making another # tarfile. distcheck: dist -rm -rf $(distdir) GZIP=$(GZIP_ENV) $(TAR) zxf $(distdir).tar.gz mkdir $(distdir)/=build mkdir $(distdir)/=inst dc_install_base=`cd $(distdir)/=inst && pwd`; \ cd $(distdir)/=build \ && ../configure --srcdir=.. --prefix=$$dc_install_base \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) dvi \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) check \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) installcheck \ && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) dist -rm -rf $(distdir) @banner="$(distdir).tar.gz is ready for distribution"; \ dashes=`echo "$$banner" | sed s/./=/g`; \ echo "$$dashes"; \ echo "$$banner"; \ echo "$$dashes" dist: distdir -chmod -R a+r $(distdir) GZIP=$(GZIP_ENV) $(TAR) chozf $(distdir).tar.gz $(distdir) -rm -rf $(distdir) dist-all: distdir -chmod -R a+r $(distdir) GZIP=$(GZIP_ENV) $(TAR) chozf $(distdir).tar.gz $(distdir) -rm -rf $(distdir) distdir: $(DISTFILES) -rm -rf $(distdir) mkdir $(distdir) -chmod 777 $(distdir) @for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ d=$(srcdir); \ if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ cp -pr $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file; \ else \ test -f $(distdir)/$$file \ || ln $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file 2> /dev/null \ || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file || :; \ fi; \ done for subdir in $(SUBDIRS); do \ if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ test -d $(distdir)/$$subdir \ || mkdir $(distdir)/$$subdir \ || exit 1; \ chmod 777 $(distdir)/$$subdir; \ (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) top_distdir=../$(distdir) distdir=../$(distdir)/$$subdir distdir) \ || exit 1; \ fi; \ done RUNTESTFLAGS = DEJATOOL = $(PACKAGE) RUNTESTDEFAULTFLAGS = --tool $(DEJATOOL) --srcdir $$srcdir check-DEJAGNU: site.exp srcdir=`cd $(srcdir) && pwd`; export srcdir; \ EXPECT=$(EXPECT); export EXPECT; \ runtest=$(RUNTEST); \ if $(SHELL) -c "$$runtest --version" > /dev/null 2>&1; then \ $$runtest $(RUNTESTDEFAULTFLAGS) $(RUNTESTFLAGS); \ else echo "WARNING: could not find \`runtest'" 1>&2; :;\ fi site.exp: Makefile @echo 'Making a new site.exp file...' @test ! -f site.bak || rm -f site.bak @echo '## these variables are automatically generated by make ##' > $@-t @echo '# Do not edit here. If you wish to override these values' >> $@-t @echo '# edit the last section' >> $@-t @echo 'set tool $(DEJATOOL)' >> $@-t @echo 'set srcdir $(srcdir)' >> $@-t @echo 'set objdir' `pwd` >> $@-t @echo '## All variables above are generated by configure. Do Not Edit ##' >> $@-t @test ! -f site.exp || sed '1,/^## All variables above are.*##/ d' site.exp >> $@-t @test ! -f site.exp || mv site.exp site.bak @mv $@-t site.exp info-am: info: info-recursive dvi-am: dvi: dvi-recursive check-am: all-am $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) check-DEJAGNU check: check-recursive installcheck-am: installcheck: installcheck-recursive install-exec-am: install-exec: install-exec-recursive install-data-am: install-data: install-data-recursive install-am: all-am @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am install: install-recursive uninstall-am: uninstall: uninstall-recursive all-am: Makefile all-redirect: all-recursive install-strip: $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS=-s install installdirs: installdirs-recursive installdirs-am: mostlyclean-generic: clean-generic: distclean-generic: -rm -f Makefile $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) -rm -f config.cache config.log stamp-h stamp-h[0-9]* maintainer-clean-generic: mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-tags mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean: mostlyclean-recursive clean-am: clean-tags clean-generic mostlyclean-am clean: clean-recursive distclean-am: distclean-tags distclean-generic clean-am distclean: distclean-recursive -rm -f config.status maintainer-clean-am: maintainer-clean-tags maintainer-clean-generic \ distclean-am @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-recursive -rm -f config.status .PHONY: install-data-recursive uninstall-data-recursive \ install-exec-recursive uninstall-exec-recursive installdirs-recursive \ uninstalldirs-recursive all-recursive check-recursive \ installcheck-recursive info-recursive dvi-recursive \ mostlyclean-recursive distclean-recursive clean-recursive \ maintainer-clean-recursive tags tags-recursive mostlyclean-tags \ distclean-tags clean-tags maintainer-clean-tags distdir check-DEJAGNU \ info-am info dvi-am dvi check check-am installcheck-am installcheck \ install-exec-am install-exec install-data-am install-data install-am \ install uninstall-am uninstall all-redirect all-am all installdirs-am \ installdirs mostlyclean-generic distclean-generic clean-generic \ maintainer-clean-generic clean mostlyclean distclean maintainer-clean # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: cronolog-1.6.2/README0000644000031100003110000002357407027367517007714 CRONOLOG version 1.6.1 "cronolog" is a simple program that reads log messages from its input and writes them to a set of output files, the names of which are constructed using template and the current date and time. The template uses the same format specifiers as the Unix date command (which are the same as the standard C strftime library function). "cronolog" is intended to be used in conjunction with a Web server, such as Apache to split the access log into daily or monthly logs. For example the Apache configuration directives: TransferLog "|/www/sbin/cronolog /www/logs/%Y/%m/%d/access.log" ErrorLog "|/www/sbin/cronolog /www/logs/%Y/%m/%d/errors.log" would instruct Apache to pipe its access and error log messages into separate copies of cronolog, which would create new log files each day in a directory hierarchy structured by date, i.e. on 31 December 1996 messages would be written to /www/logs/1996/12/31/access.log /www/logs/1996/12/31/errors.log after midnight the files /www/logs/1997/01/01/access.log /www/logs/1997/01/01/errors.log would be used, with the directories 1997, 1997/01 and 1997/01/01 being created if they did not already exist. Each character in the template represents a character in the expanded filename, except for date and time format specifiers, which are replaced by their expansion. Format specifiers consist of a `%' followed by one of the following characters: % a literal % character n a new-line character t a horizontal tab character Time fields: H hour (00..23) I hour (01..12) p the locale's AM or PM indicator M minute (00..59) S second (00..61, which allows for leap seconds) X the locale's time representation (e.g.: "15:12:47") Z time zone (e.g. GMT), or nothing if the time zone cannot be determined Date fields: a the locale's abbreviated weekday name (e.g.: Sun..Sat) A the locale's full weekday name (e.g.: Sunday .. Saturday) b the locale's abbreviated month name (e.g.: Jan .. Dec) B the locale's full month name, (e.g.: January .. December) c the locale's date and time (e.g.: "Sun Dec 15 14:12:47 GMT 1996") d day of month (01 .. 31) j day of year (001 .. 366) m month (01 .. 12) U week of the year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53, where week 1 is the week containing the first Sunday of the year) W week of the year with Monday as first day of week (00..53, where week 1 is the week containing the first Monday of the year) w day of week (0 .. 6, where 0 corresponds to Sunday) x locale's date representation (e.g. today in Britain: "15/12/96") y year without the century (00 .. 99) Y year with the century (1970 .. 2038) Other specifiers may be available depending on the C library's implementation of the strftime function. Before writing a message cronolog checks the time to see whether the current log file is still valid and if not it closes the current file, expands the template using the current date and time to generate a new file name, opens the new file (creating missing directories on the path of the new log file as needed unless the program is compiled with -DDONT_CREATE_SUBDIRS) and calculates the time at which the new file will become invalid. The most up-to-date version of "cronolog" can be found at: http://www.ford-mason.co.uk/resources/cronolog/ INSTALLATION ============ Cronolog uses GNU autoconf, so it is configured and built with the standard sequence: ./configure make To install type "make install" or simply copy the executable "src/cronolog" to a suitable directory. Cronolog has a number of options that can be set either by including in CFLAGS when configuring, or by editing the file "src/config.h": -DFILE_MODE=octal-number mode used for creating files (default is 0664) -DDIR_MODE=octal-number mode used for creating directories (default is 0775) -DDONT_CREATE_SUBDIRS don't include code to create missing directories -DNEED_GETOPT_DEFS if your platform doesn't declare getopt() e.g. to set the file mode to 0600: CFLAGS="-O2 -DFILE_MODE=0600" ./configure TESTING ======= The package includes a simple test harness program (cronotest), which tests out the lower level functions and prints out debugging information. The test program is run with the command line: cronotest [-d] "template" count template is the filename template and count is the number of periods to evaluate, for example: $ cronotest "%Y/%m/%d/access.log" 4 Determining periodicity of "%Y/%m/%d/access.log" %Y -> yearly %m -> monthly %d -> daily Rotation period is per day Start time is Sun Dec 15 15:55:43 1996 (850665343) Period 1 starts at Sun Dec 15 00:00:00 1996 (850608000): "1996/12/15/access.log" Period 2 starts at Mon Dec 16 00:00:00 1996 (850694400): "1996/12/16/access.log" Period 3 starts at Tue Dec 17 00:00:00 1996 (850780800): "1996/12/17/access.log" Period 4 starts at Wed Dec 18 00:00:00 1996 (850867200): "1996/12/18/access.log" Specifying the flag -d instructs the test program to create missing subdirectories, for example, having created a directory 1996: $ cronotest -d "%Y/%m/%d/access.log" 4 Determining periodicity of "%Y/%m/%d/access.log" %Y -> yearly %m -> monthly %d -> daily Rotation period is per day Start time is Sun Dec 15 16:00:21 1996 (850665621) Period 1 starts at Sun Dec 15 00:00:00 1996 (850608000): "1996/12/15/access.log" Creating missing components of 1996/12/15/access.log Testing directory "1996" Testing directory "1996/12" Directory "1996/12" does not exist -- creating Testing directory "1996/12/15" Directory "1996/12/15" does not exist -- creating Period 2 starts at Mon Dec 16 00:00:00 1996 (850694400): "1996/12/16/access.log" Creating missing components of 1996/12/16/access.log Initial prefix "1996" known to exist Initial prefix "1996/12" known to exist Testing directory 1996/12/16 Directory "1996/12/16" does not exist -- creating Period 3 starts at Tue Dec 17 00:00:00 1996 (850780800): "1996/12/17/access.log" Creating missing components of 1996/12/17/access.log Initial prefix "1996" known to exist Initial prefix "1996/12" known to exist Testing directory 1996/12/17 Directory "1996/12/17" does not exist -- creating Period 4 starts at Wed Dec 18 00:00:00 1996 (850867200): "1996/12/18/access.log" Creating missing components of 1996/12/18/access.log Initial prefix "1996" known to exist Initial prefix "1996/12" known to exist Testing directory 1996/12/18 Directory "1996/12/18" does not exist -- creating Extra debugging code was added to cronolog at version 1.5b8 to facilitate interactive testing. To activate this cronolog must be must be invoked with -x (use -x- to send debug messages to stderr). In this mode each time it reads a message cronolog will print a message giving the current time, the start of the next period and the number of seconds until the start of the next period. This option is obviously not very useful when cronolog is being used for a production server handling several thousands or millions of requests a day, but can be useful for checking that cronolog is working correctly. You could set up a virtual server that was only used for testing and periodically send it a request. The -s option allows a start time to be specified -- cronolog will pretend that that is the current time. The following transcript shows how cronolog can be used for such a test. Lines prefixed by "**" are the lines I typed. The log file template creates a new log file every minute in a new directory. I specified a start time a minute before the change from GMT to BST (British Summer Time). ** [andrew@icarus src]$ cronolog -x- -s "29 March 1998 00:59" \ "tmp/%Y.%m.%d/%H:%M/%Y.%m.%d-%H:%M-access.log" cronolog version 1.5b8 Copyright (C) 1997 Ford & Mason Ltd. This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Written by Andrew Ford The latest version can be found at: http://www.ford-mason.co.uk/resources/cronolog/ Using offset of 1606971 seconds from real time Determining periodicity of "tmp/%Y.%m.%d/%H:%M/%Y.%m.%d-%H:%M-access.log" %Y -> yearly %m -> monthly %d -> daily %H -> hourly %M -> per minute periodicity = minute ** MESSAGE ONE 1998/03/29-00:59:04 GMT (891133144): using log file \ "tmp/1998.03.29/00:59/1998.03.29-00:59-access.log" \ until 1998/03/29-02:00:00 BST (891133200) (for 56 secs) Creating missing components of "tmp/1998.03.29/00:59/1998.03.29-00:59-access.log" Testing directory "tmp" Directory "tmp" does not exist -- creating Testing directory "tmp/1998.03.29" Directory "tmp/1998.03.29" does not exist -- creating Testing directory "tmp/1998.03.29/00:59" Directory "tmp/1998.03.29/00:59" does not exist -- creating 1998/03/29-00:59:04 GMT (891133144): wrote message; \ next period starts at 1998/03/29-02:00:00 BST (891133200) in 56 secs ** MESSAGE TWO 1998/03/29-00:59:32 GMT (891133172): wrote message; \ next period starts at 1998/03/29-02:00:00 BST (891133200) in 28 secs ** MESSAGE THREE 1998/03/29-02:00:00 BST (891133200): using log file \ "tmp/1998.03.29/02:00/1998.03.29-02:00-access.log" \ until 1998/03/29-02:01:00 BST (891133260) (for 60 secs) Creating missing components of "tmp/1998.03.29/02:00/1998.03.29-02:00-access.log" Initial prefix "tmp" known to exist Initial prefix "tmp/1998.03.29" known to exist Testing directory "tmp/1998.03.29/02:00" Directory "tmp/1998.03.29/02:00" does not exist -- creating 1998/03/29-02:00:00 BST (891133200): wrote message; \ next period starts at 1998/03/29-02:01:00 BST (891133260) in 60 secs This output shows cronolog: * checking the periodicity of the log file template * creating missing directories for new log files * skipping stat() tests on directories it "knows" already exist * recalculating the time until a new log file needs to be opened cronolog-1.6.2/AUTHORS0000644000031100003110000000006206500477351010060 Written by Andrew Ford . cronolog-1.6.2/COPYING0000644000031100003110000004317306322767306010061 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. Copyright (C) 19yy This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. , 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License. cronolog-1.6.2/ChangeLog0000644000031100003110000000322507027367661010575 1999-12-20 Andrew Ford * New version 1.6.1 * New (Apache) license terms applied and code submitted to Apache Software Foundation 1999-12-16 Andrew Ford * New version 1.6 * patch from Charles Thayer to fix a bug whereby if cronolog is started shortly before the end of a period it will not rotate until the end of the next period. Thu Jun 4 15:48:01 1998 Andrew Ford * Bumped beta version number to 1.5b9 * src/cronolog.c: removed spurious semicolon from if statement * src/cronotest.c: ditto * TODO: remove mention of symbolic link Sun Mar 8 11:01:33 1998 Andrew Ford * Updated README file and documentation (changed URLs to point to www.ford-mason.uk as archive site) * src/config.h: new file (split out of src/cronoutils.h) * src/cronolog.c: rearranged main loop so that a new log file is not created until a message has been read, to avoid creating empty log files * src/cronolog.c: more debug messages Wed Apr 9 20:47:57 1997 Andrew Ford * AUTHORS NEWS: New files. Fri Dec 20 11:05:59 1996 Andrew Ford * Version 1.4 released -- optimized create_subdirs to avoid unnecessary calls to stat(). Updated documentation and comments. Mon Dec 16 09:30:04 1996 Andrew Ford * Version 1.3 released -- fixed portability bugs * cronolog.c: added extra includes and NEED_GETOPT_DEFS flag Sun Dec 15 12:30:03 1996 Andrew Ford * First version (1.2) ready for release. cronolog-1.6.2/INSTALL0000644000031100003110000001644706323503315010050 Basic Installation ================== These are generic installation instructions. The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for various system-dependent variables used during compilation. It uses those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package. It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent definitions. Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, a file `config.cache' that saves the results of its tests to speed up reconfiguring, and a file `config.log' containing compiler output (useful mainly for debugging `configure'). If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can be considered for the next release. If at some point `config.cache' contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it. The file `configure.in' is used to create `configure' by a program called `autoconf'. You only need `configure.in' if you want to change it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version of `autoconf'. The simplest way to compile this package is: 1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type `./configure' to configure the package for your system. If you're using `csh' on an old version of System V, you might need to type `sh ./configure' instead to prevent `csh' from trying to execute `configure' itself. Running `configure' takes a while. While running, it prints some messages telling which features it is checking for. 2. Type `make' to compile the package. 3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with the package. 4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and documentation. 5. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the source code directory by typing `make clean'. To also remove the files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'. There is also a `make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly for the package's developers. If you use it, you may have to get all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came with the distribution. Compilers and Options ===================== Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that the `configure' script does not know about. You can give `configure' initial values for variables by setting them in the environment. Using a Bourne-compatible shell, you can do that on the command line like this: CC=c89 CFLAGS=-O2 LIBS=-lposix ./configure Or on systems that have the `env' program, you can do it like this: env CPPFLAGS=-I/usr/local/include LDFLAGS=-s ./configure Compiling For Multiple Architectures ==================================== You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their own directory. To do this, you must use a version of `make' that supports the `VPATH' variable, such as GNU `make'. `cd' to the directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run the `configure' script. `configure' automatically checks for the source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'. If you have to use a `make' that does not supports the `VPATH' variable, you have to compile the package for one architecture at a time in the source code directory. After you have installed the package for one architecture, use `make distclean' before reconfiguring for another architecture. Installation Names ================== By default, `make install' will install the package's files in `/usr/local/bin', `/usr/local/man', etc. You can specify an installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving `configure' the option `--prefix=PATH'. You can specify separate installation prefixes for architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files. If you give `configure' the option `--exec-prefix=PATH', the package will use PATH as the prefix for installing programs and libraries. Documentation and other data files will still use the regular prefix. If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'. Optional Features ================= Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to `configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package. They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System). The `README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the package recognizes. For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't, you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and `--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations. Specifying the System Type ========================== There may be some features `configure' can not figure out automatically, but needs to determine by the type of host the package will run on. Usually `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints a message saying it can not guess the host type, give it the `--host=TYPE' option. TYPE can either be a short name for the system type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name with three fields: CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field. If `config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't need to know the host type. If you are building compiler tools for cross-compiling, you can also use the `--target=TYPE' option to select the type of system they will produce code for and the `--build=TYPE' option to select the type of system on which you are compiling the package. Sharing Defaults ================ If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share, you can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives default values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'. `configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then `PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists. Or, you can set the `CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script. A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script. Operation Controls ================== `configure' recognizes the following options to control how it operates. `--cache-file=FILE' Use and save the results of the tests in FILE instead of `./config.cache'. Set FILE to `/dev/null' to disable caching, for debugging `configure'. `--help' Print a summary of the options to `configure', and exit. `--quiet' `--silent' `-q' Do not print messages saying which checks are being made. `--srcdir=DIR' Look for the package's source code in directory DIR. Usually `configure' can determine that directory automatically. `--version' Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure' script, and exit. `configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options. cronolog-1.6.2/Makefile.am0000644000031100003110000000024707274467260011060 ## Process this file with automake to create Makefile.in AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = gnu dejagnu EXTRA_DIST = cronolog.spec SUBDIRS = lib src doc testsuite cronolog-1.6.2/NEWS0000644000031100003110000000412607027367765007530 1.6.1 (20-Dec-1999) * Cronolog submitted to Apache Software Foundation 1.6 (16-Dec-1999) * Fixed bug in cronolog whereby if it was started shortly before the end of a period it would not rotate until the end of the next period. (Thanks to Charles Thayer for identifying the bug and supplying the fix.) 1.5b9 (04-Jun-1998) * Fixed typo in cronolog.c and cronotest.c [[ if (start_time); { ... } ]] (gcc -Wall doesn't even flag it!) * changed definition of multi-line string constants to use proper ANSI string concatenation 1.5b8 (08-Mar-1998) * Log files only created after a message has been read (you shouldn't get empty files) * time() called only once per message * Extra debugging code (see README) * Updated documentation Major changes in release 1.5 (11-Apr-1997): * Fixed problem with change to daylight saving time (summer time). * Restructured to conform to GNU standards (now uses GNU automake and autoconf). Major changes in release 1.4 (20-Dec-1996): * Optimization of create_subdirs: don't bother stat'ing directories that form part of a common prefix with the last filename checked. Major changes in release 1.3 (16-Dec-1996): * Fixed portability bugs. Major changes in release 1.2 (15-Dec-1996): * Creates missing directories as needed. * First version announced on comp.infosys.www.servers.unix (renamed to cronolog). Major changes in release 1.1 (09-Dec-1996): * Fixed problem with log files being created with the wrong dates. (When a new log file is due to be created, the time used for filling out the template should be the start of the current period and not the time at which a new log file is due. This was observed with daily logs where there were no transfers for two days; the next log file generated had the date of the first of the days with no transfers.) * Also added more comments and fixed handling of week numbers where weeks start on a Monday. Major changes in release 1.0 (06-Dec-1996): * Initial version sent to Apache developers' mailing list (at that time cronolog was called strftimelog) cronolog-1.6.2/TODO0000644000031100003110000000136307027367352007511 * Rewrite cronolog as an Apache module as well as a standalone program. * Option to run an extenal program (such as wwwstat or gzip) on each log file once it is finished with. (Problem is: if multiple processes are logging to the same file, how do we know which one should run the program?) * Test suite (this should be straightforward with new debug options). * Option to specify the rotation period explicitly. The template might imply a more frequent rotation period, but would have to be able to differentiate the different log files. For example you could say rotate hourly but include a minute specifier in the template, but it would be illegal to say rotate hourly but have a template of "%Y%m%d" (which implies rotate daily). cronolog-1.6.2/aclocal.m40000644000031100003110000000672307274303710010656 dnl aclocal.m4 generated automatically by aclocal 1.4 dnl Copyright (C) 1994, 1995-8, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. dnl This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation dnl gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, dnl with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. dnl This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, dnl but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without dnl even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A dnl PARTICULAR PURPOSE. # Do all the work for Automake. This macro actually does too much -- # some checks are only needed if your package does certain things. # But this isn't really a big deal. # serial 1 dnl Usage: dnl AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(package,version, [no-define]) AC_DEFUN(AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE, [AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_INSTALL]) PACKAGE=[$1] AC_SUBST(PACKAGE) VERSION=[$2] AC_SUBST(VERSION) dnl test to see if srcdir already configured if test "`cd $srcdir && pwd`" != "`pwd`" && test -f $srcdir/config.status; then AC_MSG_ERROR([source directory already configured; run "make distclean" there first]) fi ifelse([$3],, AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(PACKAGE, "$PACKAGE", [Name of package]) AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(VERSION, "$VERSION", [Version number of package])) AC_REQUIRE([AM_SANITY_CHECK]) AC_REQUIRE([AC_ARG_PROGRAM]) dnl FIXME This is truly gross. missing_dir=`cd $ac_aux_dir && pwd` AM_MISSING_PROG(ACLOCAL, aclocal, $missing_dir) AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOCONF, autoconf, $missing_dir) AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOMAKE, automake, $missing_dir) AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOHEADER, autoheader, $missing_dir) AM_MISSING_PROG(MAKEINFO, makeinfo, $missing_dir) AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_MAKE_SET])]) # # Check to make sure that the build environment is sane. # AC_DEFUN(AM_SANITY_CHECK, [AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether build environment is sane]) # Just in case sleep 1 echo timestamp > conftestfile # Do `set' in a subshell so we don't clobber the current shell's # arguments. Must try -L first in case configure is actually a # symlink; some systems play weird games with the mod time of symlinks # (eg FreeBSD returns the mod time of the symlink's containing # directory). if ( set X `ls -Lt $srcdir/configure conftestfile 2> /dev/null` if test "[$]*" = "X"; then # -L didn't work. set X `ls -t $srcdir/configure conftestfile` fi if test "[$]*" != "X $srcdir/configure conftestfile" \ && test "[$]*" != "X conftestfile $srcdir/configure"; then # If neither matched, then we have a broken ls. This can happen # if, for instance, CONFIG_SHELL is bash and it inherits a # broken ls alias from the environment. This has actually # happened. Such a system could not be considered "sane". AC_MSG_ERROR([ls -t appears to fail. Make sure there is not a broken alias in your environment]) fi test "[$]2" = conftestfile ) then # Ok. : else AC_MSG_ERROR([newly created file is older than distributed files! Check your system clock]) fi rm -f conftest* AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)]) dnl AM_MISSING_PROG(NAME, PROGRAM, DIRECTORY) dnl The program must properly implement --version. AC_DEFUN(AM_MISSING_PROG, [AC_MSG_CHECKING(for working $2) # Run test in a subshell; some versions of sh will print an error if # an executable is not found, even if stderr is redirected. # Redirect stdin to placate older versions of autoconf. Sigh. if ($2 --version) < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then $1=$2 AC_MSG_RESULT(found) else $1="$3/missing $2" AC_MSG_RESULT(missing) fi AC_SUBST($1)]) cronolog-1.6.2/configure0000755000031100003110000021262307274305346010732 #! /bin/sh # From configure.in Revision: 1.8 # Do all the work for Automake. This macro actually does too much -- # some checks are only needed if your package does certain things. # But this isn't really a big deal. # serial 1 # # Check to make sure that the build environment is sane. # # Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles. # Generated automatically using autoconf version 2.13 # Copyright (C) 1992, 93, 94, 95, 96 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it. # Defaults: ac_help= ac_default_prefix=/usr/local # Any additions from configure.in: # Initialize some variables set by options. # The variables have the same names as the options, with # dashes changed to underlines. build=NONE cache_file=./config.cache exec_prefix=NONE host=NONE no_create= nonopt=NONE no_recursion= prefix=NONE program_prefix=NONE program_suffix=NONE program_transform_name=s,x,x, silent= site= srcdir= target=NONE verbose= x_includes=NONE x_libraries=NONE bindir='${exec_prefix}/bin' sbindir='${exec_prefix}/sbin' libexecdir='${exec_prefix}/libexec' datadir='${prefix}/share' sysconfdir='${prefix}/etc' sharedstatedir='${prefix}/com' localstatedir='${prefix}/var' libdir='${exec_prefix}/lib' includedir='${prefix}/include' oldincludedir='/usr/include' infodir='${prefix}/info' mandir='${prefix}/man' # Initialize some other variables. subdirs= MFLAGS= MAKEFLAGS= SHELL=${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} # Maximum number of lines to put in a shell here document. ac_max_here_lines=12 ac_prev= for ac_option do # If the previous option needs an argument, assign it. if test -n "$ac_prev"; then eval "$ac_prev=\$ac_option" ac_prev= continue fi case "$ac_option" in -*=*) ac_optarg=`echo "$ac_option" | sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]*=//'` ;; *) ac_optarg= ;; esac # Accept the important Cygnus configure options, so we can diagnose typos. case "$ac_option" in -bindir | --bindir | --bindi | --bind | --bin | --bi) ac_prev=bindir ;; -bindir=* | --bindir=* | --bindi=* | --bind=* | --bin=* | --bi=*) bindir="$ac_optarg" ;; -build | --build | --buil | --bui | --bu) ac_prev=build ;; -build=* | --build=* | --buil=* | --bui=* | --bu=*) build="$ac_optarg" ;; -cache-file | --cache-file | --cache-fil | --cache-fi \ | --cache-f | --cache- | --cache | --cach | --cac | --ca | --c) ac_prev=cache_file ;; -cache-file=* | --cache-file=* | --cache-fil=* | --cache-fi=* \ | --cache-f=* | --cache-=* | --cache=* | --cach=* | --cac=* | --ca=* | --c=*) cache_file="$ac_optarg" ;; -datadir | --datadir | --datadi | --datad | --data | --dat | --da) ac_prev=datadir ;; -datadir=* | --datadir=* | --datadi=* | --datad=* | --data=* | --dat=* \ | --da=*) datadir="$ac_optarg" ;; -disable-* | --disable-*) ac_feature=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*disable-//'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. if test -n "`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/[-a-zA-Z0-9_]//g'`"; then { echo "configure: error: $ac_feature: invalid feature name" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi ac_feature=`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/-/_/g'` eval "enable_${ac_feature}=no" ;; -enable-* | --enable-*) ac_feature=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*enable-//' -e 's/=.*//'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. if test -n "`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]//g'`"; then { echo "configure: error: $ac_feature: invalid feature name" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi ac_feature=`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/-/_/g'` case "$ac_option" in *=*) ;; *) ac_optarg=yes ;; esac eval "enable_${ac_feature}='$ac_optarg'" ;; -exec-prefix | --exec_prefix | --exec-prefix | --exec-prefi \ | --exec-pref | --exec-pre | --exec-pr | --exec-p | --exec- \ | --exec | --exe | --ex) ac_prev=exec_prefix ;; -exec-prefix=* | --exec_prefix=* | --exec-prefix=* | --exec-prefi=* \ | --exec-pref=* | --exec-pre=* | --exec-pr=* | --exec-p=* | --exec-=* \ | --exec=* | --exe=* | --ex=*) exec_prefix="$ac_optarg" ;; -gas | --gas | --ga | --g) # Obsolete; use --with-gas. with_gas=yes ;; -help | --help | --hel | --he) # Omit some internal or obsolete options to make the list less imposing. # This message is too long to be a string in the A/UX 3.1 sh. cat << EOF Usage: configure [options] [host] Options: [defaults in brackets after descriptions] Configuration: --cache-file=FILE cache test results in FILE --help print this message --no-create do not create output files --quiet, --silent do not print \`checking...' messages --version print the version of autoconf that created configure Directory and file names: --prefix=PREFIX install architecture-independent files in PREFIX [$ac_default_prefix] --exec-prefix=EPREFIX install architecture-dependent files in EPREFIX [same as prefix] --bindir=DIR user executables in DIR [EPREFIX/bin] --sbindir=DIR system admin executables in DIR [EPREFIX/sbin] --libexecdir=DIR program executables in DIR [EPREFIX/libexec] --datadir=DIR read-only architecture-independent data in DIR [PREFIX/share] --sysconfdir=DIR read-only single-machine data in DIR [PREFIX/etc] --sharedstatedir=DIR modifiable architecture-independent data in DIR [PREFIX/com] --localstatedir=DIR modifiable single-machine data in DIR [PREFIX/var] --libdir=DIR object code libraries in DIR [EPREFIX/lib] --includedir=DIR C header files in DIR [PREFIX/include] --oldincludedir=DIR C header files for non-gcc in DIR [/usr/include] --infodir=DIR info documentation in DIR [PREFIX/info] --mandir=DIR man documentation in DIR [PREFIX/man] --srcdir=DIR find the sources in DIR [configure dir or ..] --program-prefix=PREFIX prepend PREFIX to installed program names --program-suffix=SUFFIX append SUFFIX to installed program names --program-transform-name=PROGRAM run sed PROGRAM on installed program names EOF cat << EOF Host type: --build=BUILD configure for building on BUILD [BUILD=HOST] --host=HOST configure for HOST [guessed] --target=TARGET configure for TARGET [TARGET=HOST] Features and packages: --disable-FEATURE do not include FEATURE (same as --enable-FEATURE=no) --enable-FEATURE[=ARG] include FEATURE [ARG=yes] --with-PACKAGE[=ARG] use PACKAGE [ARG=yes] --without-PACKAGE do not use PACKAGE (same as --with-PACKAGE=no) --x-includes=DIR X include files are in DIR --x-libraries=DIR X library files are in DIR EOF if test -n "$ac_help"; then echo "--enable and --with options recognized:$ac_help" fi exit 0 ;; -host | --host | --hos | --ho) ac_prev=host ;; -host=* | --host=* | --hos=* | --ho=*) host="$ac_optarg" ;; -includedir | --includedir | --includedi | --included | --include \ | --includ | --inclu | --incl | --inc) ac_prev=includedir ;; -includedir=* | --includedir=* | --includedi=* | --included=* | --include=* \ | --includ=* | --inclu=* | --incl=* | --inc=*) includedir="$ac_optarg" ;; -infodir | --infodir | --infodi | --infod | --info | --inf) ac_prev=infodir ;; -infodir=* | --infodir=* | --infodi=* | --infod=* | --info=* | --inf=*) infodir="$ac_optarg" ;; -libdir | --libdir | --libdi | --libd) ac_prev=libdir ;; -libdir=* | --libdir=* | --libdi=* | --libd=*) libdir="$ac_optarg" ;; -libexecdir | --libexecdir | --libexecdi | --libexecd | --libexec \ | --libexe | --libex | --libe) ac_prev=libexecdir ;; -libexecdir=* | --libexecdir=* | --libexecdi=* | --libexecd=* | --libexec=* \ | --libexe=* | --libex=* | --libe=*) libexecdir="$ac_optarg" ;; -localstatedir | --localstatedir | --localstatedi | --localstated \ | --localstate | --localstat | --localsta | --localst \ | --locals | --local | --loca | --loc | --lo) ac_prev=localstatedir ;; -localstatedir=* | --localstatedir=* | --localstatedi=* | --localstated=* \ | --localstate=* | --localstat=* | --localsta=* | --localst=* \ | --locals=* | --local=* | --loca=* | --loc=* | --lo=*) localstatedir="$ac_optarg" ;; -mandir | --mandir | --mandi | --mand | --man | --ma | --m) ac_prev=mandir ;; -mandir=* | --mandir=* | --mandi=* | --mand=* | --man=* | --ma=* | --m=*) mandir="$ac_optarg" ;; -nfp | --nfp | --nf) # Obsolete; use --without-fp. with_fp=no ;; -no-create | --no-create | --no-creat | --no-crea | --no-cre \ | --no-cr | --no-c) no_create=yes ;; -no-recursion | --no-recursion | --no-recursio | --no-recursi \ | --no-recurs | --no-recur | --no-recu | --no-rec | --no-re | --no-r) no_recursion=yes ;; -oldincludedir | --oldincludedir | --oldincludedi | --oldincluded \ | --oldinclude | --oldinclud | --oldinclu | --oldincl | --oldinc \ | --oldin | --oldi | --old | --ol | --o) ac_prev=oldincludedir ;; -oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedi=* | --oldincluded=* \ | --oldinclude=* | --oldinclud=* | --oldinclu=* | --oldincl=* | --oldinc=* \ | --oldin=* | --oldi=* | --old=* | --ol=* | --o=*) oldincludedir="$ac_optarg" ;; -prefix | --prefix | --prefi | --pref | --pre | --pr | --p) ac_prev=prefix ;; -prefix=* | --prefix=* | --prefi=* | --pref=* | --pre=* | --pr=* | --p=*) prefix="$ac_optarg" ;; -program-prefix | --program-prefix | --program-prefi | --program-pref \ | --program-pre | --program-pr | --program-p) ac_prev=program_prefix ;; -program-prefix=* | --program-prefix=* | --program-prefi=* \ | --program-pref=* | --program-pre=* | --program-pr=* | --program-p=*) program_prefix="$ac_optarg" ;; -program-suffix | --program-suffix | --program-suffi | --program-suff \ | --program-suf | --program-su | --program-s) ac_prev=program_suffix ;; -program-suffix=* | --program-suffix=* | --program-suffi=* \ | --program-suff=* | --program-suf=* | --program-su=* | --program-s=*) program_suffix="$ac_optarg" ;; -program-transform-name | --program-transform-name \ | --program-transform-nam | --program-transform-na \ | --program-transform-n | --program-transform- \ | --program-transform | --program-transfor \ | --program-transfo | --program-transf \ | --program-trans | --program-tran \ | --progr-tra | --program-tr | --program-t) ac_prev=program_transform_name ;; -program-transform-name=* | --program-transform-name=* \ | --program-transform-nam=* | --program-transform-na=* \ | --program-transform-n=* | --program-transform-=* \ | --program-transform=* | --program-transfor=* \ | --program-transfo=* | --program-transf=* \ | --program-trans=* | --program-tran=* \ | --progr-tra=* | --program-tr=* | --program-t=*) program_transform_name="$ac_optarg" ;; -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \ | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil) silent=yes ;; -sbindir | --sbindir | --sbindi | --sbind | --sbin | --sbi | --sb) ac_prev=sbindir ;; -sbindir=* | --sbindir=* | --sbindi=* | --sbind=* | --sbin=* \ | --sbi=* | --sb=*) sbindir="$ac_optarg" ;; -sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedi \ | --sharedstated | --sharedstate | --sharedstat | --sharedsta \ | --sharedst | --shareds | --shared | --share | --shar \ | --sha | --sh) ac_prev=sharedstatedir ;; -sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedi=* \ | --sharedstated=* | --sharedstate=* | --sharedstat=* | --sharedsta=* \ | --sharedst=* | --shareds=* | --shared=* | --share=* | --shar=* \ | --sha=* | --sh=*) sharedstatedir="$ac_optarg" ;; -site | --site | --sit) ac_prev=site ;; -site=* | --site=* | --sit=*) site="$ac_optarg" ;; -srcdir | --srcdir | --srcdi | --srcd | --src | --sr) ac_prev=srcdir ;; -srcdir=* | --srcdir=* | --srcdi=* | --srcd=* | --src=* | --sr=*) srcdir="$ac_optarg" ;; -sysconfdir | --sysconfdir | --sysconfdi | --sysconfd | --sysconf \ | --syscon | --sysco | --sysc | --sys | --sy) ac_prev=sysconfdir ;; -sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdi=* | --sysconfd=* | --sysconf=* \ | --syscon=* | --sysco=* | --sysc=* | --sys=* | --sy=*) sysconfdir="$ac_optarg" ;; -target | --target | --targe | --targ | --tar | --ta | --t) ac_prev=target ;; -target=* | --target=* | --targe=* | --targ=* | --tar=* | --ta=* | --t=*) target="$ac_optarg" ;; -v | -verbose | --verbose | --verbos | --verbo | --verb) verbose=yes ;; -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers) echo "configure generated by autoconf version 2.13" exit 0 ;; -with-* | --with-*) ac_package=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*with-//' -e 's/=.*//'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. if test -n "`echo $ac_package| sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]//g'`"; then { echo "configure: error: $ac_package: invalid package name" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi ac_package=`echo $ac_package| sed 's/-/_/g'` case "$ac_option" in *=*) ;; *) ac_optarg=yes ;; esac eval "with_${ac_package}='$ac_optarg'" ;; -without-* | --without-*) ac_package=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*without-//'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. if test -n "`echo $ac_package| sed 's/[-a-zA-Z0-9_]//g'`"; then { echo "configure: error: $ac_package: invalid package name" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi ac_package=`echo $ac_package| sed 's/-/_/g'` eval "with_${ac_package}=no" ;; --x) # Obsolete; use --with-x. with_x=yes ;; -x-includes | --x-includes | --x-include | --x-includ | --x-inclu \ | --x-incl | --x-inc | --x-in | --x-i) ac_prev=x_includes ;; -x-includes=* | --x-includes=* | --x-include=* | --x-includ=* | --x-inclu=* \ | --x-incl=* | --x-inc=* | --x-in=* | --x-i=*) x_includes="$ac_optarg" ;; -x-libraries | --x-libraries | --x-librarie | --x-librari \ | --x-librar | --x-libra | --x-libr | --x-lib | --x-li | --x-l) ac_prev=x_libraries ;; -x-libraries=* | --x-libraries=* | --x-librarie=* | --x-librari=* \ | --x-librar=* | --x-libra=* | --x-libr=* | --x-lib=* | --x-li=* | --x-l=*) x_libraries="$ac_optarg" ;; -*) { echo "configure: error: $ac_option: invalid option; use --help to show usage" 1>&2; exit 1; } ;; *) if test -n "`echo $ac_option| sed 's/[-a-z0-9.]//g'`"; then echo "configure: warning: $ac_option: invalid host type" 1>&2 fi if test "x$nonopt" != xNONE; then { echo "configure: error: can only configure for one host and one target at a time" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi nonopt="$ac_option" ;; esac done if test -n "$ac_prev"; then { echo "configure: error: missing argument to --`echo $ac_prev | sed 's/_/-/g'`" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi trap 'rm -fr conftest* confdefs* core core.* *.core $ac_clean_files; exit 1' 1 2 15 # File descriptor usage: # 0 standard input # 1 file creation # 2 errors and warnings # 3 some systems may open it to /dev/tty # 4 used on the Kubota Titan # 6 checking for... messages and results # 5 compiler messages saved in config.log if test "$silent" = yes; then exec 6>/dev/null else exec 6>&1 fi exec 5>./config.log echo "\ This file contains any messages produced by compilers while running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake. " 1>&5 # Strip out --no-create and --no-recursion so they do not pile up. # Also quote any args containing shell metacharacters. ac_configure_args= for ac_arg do case "$ac_arg" in -no-create | --no-create | --no-creat | --no-crea | --no-cre \ | --no-cr | --no-c) ;; -no-recursion | --no-recursion | --no-recursio | --no-recursi \ | --no-recurs | --no-recur | --no-recu | --no-rec | --no-re | --no-r) ;; *" "*|*" "*|*[\[\]\~\#\$\^\&\*\(\)\{\}\\\|\;\<\>\?]*) ac_configure_args="$ac_configure_args '$ac_arg'" ;; *) ac_configure_args="$ac_configure_args $ac_arg" ;; esac done # NLS nuisances. # Only set these to C if already set. These must not be set unconditionally # because not all systems understand e.g. LANG=C (notably SCO). # Fixing LC_MESSAGES prevents Solaris sh from translating var values in `set'! # Non-C LC_CTYPE values break the ctype check. if test "${LANG+set}" = set; then LANG=C; export LANG; fi if test "${LC_ALL+set}" = set; then LC_ALL=C; export LC_ALL; fi if test "${LC_MESSAGES+set}" = set; then LC_MESSAGES=C; export LC_MESSAGES; fi if test "${LC_CTYPE+set}" = set; then LC_CTYPE=C; export LC_CTYPE; fi # confdefs.h avoids OS command line length limits that DEFS can exceed. rm -rf conftest* confdefs.h # AIX cpp loses on an empty file, so make sure it contains at least a newline. echo > confdefs.h # A filename unique to this package, relative to the directory that # configure is in, which we can look for to find out if srcdir is correct. ac_unique_file=COPYING # Find the source files, if location was not specified. if test -z "$srcdir"; then ac_srcdir_defaulted=yes # Try the directory containing this script, then its parent. ac_prog=$0 ac_confdir=`echo $ac_prog|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'` test "x$ac_confdir" = "x$ac_prog" && ac_confdir=. srcdir=$ac_confdir if test ! -r $srcdir/$ac_unique_file; then srcdir=.. fi else ac_srcdir_defaulted=no fi if test ! -r $srcdir/$ac_unique_file; then if test "$ac_srcdir_defaulted" = yes; then { echo "configure: error: can not find sources in $ac_confdir or .." 1>&2; exit 1; } else { echo "configure: error: can not find sources in $srcdir" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi fi srcdir=`echo "${srcdir}" | sed 's%\([^/]\)/*$%\1%'` # Prefer explicitly selected file to automatically selected ones. if test -z "$CONFIG_SITE"; then if test "x$prefix" != xNONE; then CONFIG_SITE="$prefix/share/config.site $prefix/etc/config.site" else CONFIG_SITE="$ac_default_prefix/share/config.site $ac_default_prefix/etc/config.site" fi fi for ac_site_file in $CONFIG_SITE; do if test -r "$ac_site_file"; then echo "loading site script $ac_site_file" . "$ac_site_file" fi done if test -r "$cache_file"; then echo "loading cache $cache_file" . $cache_file else echo "creating cache $cache_file" > $cache_file fi ac_ext=c # CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options. ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS' ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5' ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5' cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross ac_exeext= ac_objext=o if (echo "testing\c"; echo 1,2,3) | grep c >/dev/null; then # Stardent Vistra SVR4 grep lacks -e, says ghazi@caip.rutgers.edu. if (echo -n testing; echo 1,2,3) | sed s/-n/xn/ | grep xn >/dev/null; then ac_n= ac_c=' ' ac_t=' ' else ac_n=-n ac_c= ac_t= fi else ac_n= ac_c='\c' ac_t= fi ac_aux_dir= for ac_dir in $srcdir $srcdir/.. $srcdir/../..; do if test -f $ac_dir/install-sh; then ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/install-sh -c" break elif test -f $ac_dir/install.sh; then ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/install.sh -c" break fi done if test -z "$ac_aux_dir"; then { echo "configure: error: can not find install-sh or install.sh in $srcdir $srcdir/.. $srcdir/../.." 1>&2; exit 1; } fi ac_config_guess=$ac_aux_dir/config.guess ac_config_sub=$ac_aux_dir/config.sub ac_configure=$ac_aux_dir/configure # This should be Cygnus configure. # Find a good install program. We prefer a C program (faster), # so one script is as good as another. But avoid the broken or # incompatible versions: # SysV /etc/install, /usr/sbin/install # SunOS /usr/etc/install # IRIX /sbin/install # AIX /bin/install # AIX 4 /usr/bin/installbsd, which doesn't work without a -g flag # AFS /usr/afsws/bin/install, which mishandles nonexistent args # SVR4 /usr/ucb/install, which tries to use the nonexistent group "staff" # ./install, which can be erroneously created by make from ./install.sh. echo $ac_n "checking for a BSD compatible install""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:578: checking for a BSD compatible install" >&5 if test -z "$INSTALL"; then if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_install'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_IFS="$IFS"; IFS=":" for ac_dir in $PATH; do # Account for people who put trailing slashes in PATH elements. case "$ac_dir/" in /|./|.//|/etc/*|/usr/sbin/*|/usr/etc/*|/sbin/*|/usr/afsws/bin/*|/usr/ucb/*) ;; *) # OSF1 and SCO ODT 3.0 have their own names for install. # Don't use installbsd from OSF since it installs stuff as root # by default. for ac_prog in ginstall scoinst install; do if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_prog; then if test $ac_prog = install && grep dspmsg $ac_dir/$ac_prog >/dev/null 2>&1; then # AIX install. It has an incompatible calling convention. : else ac_cv_path_install="$ac_dir/$ac_prog -c" break 2 fi fi done ;; esac done IFS="$ac_save_IFS" fi if test "${ac_cv_path_install+set}" = set; then INSTALL="$ac_cv_path_install" else # As a last resort, use the slow shell script. We don't cache a # path for INSTALL within a source directory, because that will # break other packages using the cache if that directory is # removed, or if the path is relative. INSTALL="$ac_install_sh" fi fi echo "$ac_t""$INSTALL" 1>&6 # Use test -z because SunOS4 sh mishandles braces in ${var-val}. # It thinks the first close brace ends the variable substitution. test -z "$INSTALL_PROGRAM" && INSTALL_PROGRAM='${INSTALL}' test -z "$INSTALL_SCRIPT" && INSTALL_SCRIPT='${INSTALL_PROGRAM}' test -z "$INSTALL_DATA" && INSTALL_DATA='${INSTALL} -m 644' echo $ac_n "checking whether build environment is sane""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:631: checking whether build environment is sane" >&5 # Just in case sleep 1 echo timestamp > conftestfile # Do `set' in a subshell so we don't clobber the current shell's # arguments. Must try -L first in case configure is actually a # symlink; some systems play weird games with the mod time of symlinks # (eg FreeBSD returns the mod time of the symlink's containing # directory). if ( set X `ls -Lt $srcdir/configure conftestfile 2> /dev/null` if test "$*" = "X"; then # -L didn't work. set X `ls -t $srcdir/configure conftestfile` fi if test "$*" != "X $srcdir/configure conftestfile" \ && test "$*" != "X conftestfile $srcdir/configure"; then # If neither matched, then we have a broken ls. This can happen # if, for instance, CONFIG_SHELL is bash and it inherits a # broken ls alias from the environment. This has actually # happened. Such a system could not be considered "sane". { echo "configure: error: ls -t appears to fail. Make sure there is not a broken alias in your environment" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi test "$2" = conftestfile ) then # Ok. : else { echo "configure: error: newly created file is older than distributed files! Check your system clock" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi rm -f conftest* echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 if test "$program_transform_name" = s,x,x,; then program_transform_name= else # Double any \ or $. echo might interpret backslashes. cat <<\EOF_SED > conftestsed s,\\,\\\\,g; s,\$,$$,g EOF_SED program_transform_name="`echo $program_transform_name|sed -f conftestsed`" rm -f conftestsed fi test "$program_prefix" != NONE && program_transform_name="s,^,${program_prefix},; $program_transform_name" # Use a double $ so make ignores it. test "$program_suffix" != NONE && program_transform_name="s,\$\$,${program_suffix},; $program_transform_name" # sed with no file args requires a program. test "$program_transform_name" = "" && program_transform_name="s,x,x," echo $ac_n "checking whether ${MAKE-make} sets \${MAKE}""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:688: checking whether ${MAKE-make} sets \${MAKE}" >&5 set dummy ${MAKE-make}; ac_make=`echo "$2" | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'` if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftestmake <<\EOF all: @echo 'ac_maketemp="${MAKE}"' EOF # GNU make sometimes prints "make[1]: Entering...", which would confuse us. eval `${MAKE-make} -f conftestmake 2>/dev/null | grep temp=` if test -n "$ac_maketemp"; then eval ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set=yes else eval ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set=no fi rm -f conftestmake fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_prog_make_'${ac_make}_set`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 SET_MAKE= else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 SET_MAKE="MAKE=${MAKE-make}" fi PACKAGE=cronolog VERSION=1.6.2 if test "`cd $srcdir && pwd`" != "`pwd`" && test -f $srcdir/config.status; then { echo "configure: error: source directory already configured; run "make distclean" there first" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi cat >> confdefs.h <> confdefs.h <&6 echo "configure:734: checking for working aclocal" >&5 # Run test in a subshell; some versions of sh will print an error if # an executable is not found, even if stderr is redirected. # Redirect stdin to placate older versions of autoconf. Sigh. if (aclocal --version) < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then ACLOCAL=aclocal echo "$ac_t""found" 1>&6 else ACLOCAL="$missing_dir/missing aclocal" echo "$ac_t""missing" 1>&6 fi echo $ac_n "checking for working autoconf""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:747: checking for working autoconf" >&5 # Run test in a subshell; some versions of sh will print an error if # an executable is not found, even if stderr is redirected. # Redirect stdin to placate older versions of autoconf. Sigh. if (autoconf --version) < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then AUTOCONF=autoconf echo "$ac_t""found" 1>&6 else AUTOCONF="$missing_dir/missing autoconf" echo "$ac_t""missing" 1>&6 fi echo $ac_n "checking for working automake""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:760: checking for working automake" >&5 # Run test in a subshell; some versions of sh will print an error if # an executable is not found, even if stderr is redirected. # Redirect stdin to placate older versions of autoconf. Sigh. if (automake --version) < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then AUTOMAKE=automake echo "$ac_t""found" 1>&6 else AUTOMAKE="$missing_dir/missing automake" echo "$ac_t""missing" 1>&6 fi echo $ac_n "checking for working autoheader""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:773: checking for working autoheader" >&5 # Run test in a subshell; some versions of sh will print an error if # an executable is not found, even if stderr is redirected. # Redirect stdin to placate older versions of autoconf. Sigh. if (autoheader --version) < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then AUTOHEADER=autoheader echo "$ac_t""found" 1>&6 else AUTOHEADER="$missing_dir/missing autoheader" echo "$ac_t""missing" 1>&6 fi echo $ac_n "checking for working makeinfo""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:786: checking for working makeinfo" >&5 # Run test in a subshell; some versions of sh will print an error if # an executable is not found, even if stderr is redirected. # Redirect stdin to placate older versions of autoconf. Sigh. if (makeinfo --version) < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then MAKEINFO=makeinfo echo "$ac_t""found" 1>&6 else MAKEINFO="$missing_dir/missing makeinfo" echo "$ac_t""missing" 1>&6 fi if test "$program_transform_name" = s,x,x,; then program_transform_name= else # Double any \ or $. echo might interpret backslashes. cat <<\EOF_SED > conftestsed s,\\,\\\\,g; s,\$,$$,g EOF_SED program_transform_name="`echo $program_transform_name|sed -f conftestsed`" rm -f conftestsed fi test "$program_prefix" != NONE && program_transform_name="s,^,${program_prefix},; $program_transform_name" # Use a double $ so make ignores it. test "$program_suffix" != NONE && program_transform_name="s,\$\$,${program_suffix},; $program_transform_name" # sed with no file args requires a program. test "$program_transform_name" = "" && program_transform_name="s,x,x," # Extract the first word of "gcc", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy gcc; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:823: checking for $ac_word" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else if test -n "$CC"; then ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test. else IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":" ac_dummy="$PATH" for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_prog_CC="gcc" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" fi fi CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC" if test -n "$CC"; then echo "$ac_t""$CC" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi if test -z "$CC"; then # Extract the first word of "cc", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy cc; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:853: checking for $ac_word" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else if test -n "$CC"; then ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test. else IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":" ac_prog_rejected=no ac_dummy="$PATH" for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then if test "$ac_dir/$ac_word" = "/usr/ucb/cc"; then ac_prog_rejected=yes continue fi ac_cv_prog_CC="cc" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" if test $ac_prog_rejected = yes; then # We found a bogon in the path, so make sure we never use it. set dummy $ac_cv_prog_CC shift if test $# -gt 0; then # We chose a different compiler from the bogus one. # However, it has the same basename, so the bogon will be chosen # first if we set CC to just the basename; use the full file name. shift set dummy "$ac_dir/$ac_word" "$@" shift ac_cv_prog_CC="$@" fi fi fi fi CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC" if test -n "$CC"; then echo "$ac_t""$CC" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi if test -z "$CC"; then case "`uname -s`" in *win32* | *WIN32*) # Extract the first word of "cl", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy cl; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:904: checking for $ac_word" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else if test -n "$CC"; then ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test. else IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":" ac_dummy="$PATH" for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_prog_CC="cl" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" fi fi CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC" if test -n "$CC"; then echo "$ac_t""$CC" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi ;; esac fi test -z "$CC" && { echo "configure: error: no acceptable cc found in \$PATH" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi echo $ac_n "checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) works""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:936: checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) works" >&5 ac_ext=c # CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options. ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS' ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5' ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5' cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross cat > conftest.$ac_ext << EOF #line 947 "configure" #include "confdefs.h" main(){return(0);} EOF if { (eval echo configure:952: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then ac_cv_prog_cc_works=yes # If we can't run a trivial program, we are probably using a cross compiler. if (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then ac_cv_prog_cc_cross=no else ac_cv_prog_cc_cross=yes fi else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 ac_cv_prog_cc_works=no fi rm -fr conftest* ac_ext=c # CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options. ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS' ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5' ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5' cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_works" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_prog_cc_works = no; then { echo "configure: error: installation or configuration problem: C compiler cannot create executables." 1>&2; exit 1; } fi echo $ac_n "checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) is a cross-compiler""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:978: checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) is a cross-compiler" >&5 echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross" 1>&6 cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross echo $ac_n "checking whether we are using GNU C""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:983: checking whether we are using GNU C" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_gcc'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.c <&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }; } | egrep yes >/dev/null 2>&1; then ac_cv_prog_gcc=yes else ac_cv_prog_gcc=no fi fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_gcc" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_prog_gcc = yes; then GCC=yes else GCC= fi ac_test_CFLAGS="${CFLAGS+set}" ac_save_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS" CFLAGS= echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CC-cc} accepts -g""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1011: checking whether ${CC-cc} accepts -g" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_cc_g'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else echo 'void f(){}' > conftest.c if test -z "`${CC-cc} -g -c conftest.c 2>&1`"; then ac_cv_prog_cc_g=yes else ac_cv_prog_cc_g=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_g" 1>&6 if test "$ac_test_CFLAGS" = set; then CFLAGS="$ac_save_CFLAGS" elif test $ac_cv_prog_cc_g = yes; then if test "$GCC" = yes; then CFLAGS="-g -O2" else CFLAGS="-g" fi else if test "$GCC" = yes; then CFLAGS="-O2" else CFLAGS= fi fi # Find a good install program. We prefer a C program (faster), # so one script is as good as another. But avoid the broken or # incompatible versions: # SysV /etc/install, /usr/sbin/install # SunOS /usr/etc/install # IRIX /sbin/install # AIX /bin/install # AIX 4 /usr/bin/installbsd, which doesn't work without a -g flag # AFS /usr/afsws/bin/install, which mishandles nonexistent args # SVR4 /usr/ucb/install, which tries to use the nonexistent group "staff" # ./install, which can be erroneously created by make from ./install.sh. echo $ac_n "checking for a BSD compatible install""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1054: checking for a BSD compatible install" >&5 if test -z "$INSTALL"; then if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_install'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_IFS="$IFS"; IFS=":" for ac_dir in $PATH; do # Account for people who put trailing slashes in PATH elements. case "$ac_dir/" in /|./|.//|/etc/*|/usr/sbin/*|/usr/etc/*|/sbin/*|/usr/afsws/bin/*|/usr/ucb/*) ;; *) # OSF1 and SCO ODT 3.0 have their own names for install. # Don't use installbsd from OSF since it installs stuff as root # by default. for ac_prog in ginstall scoinst install; do if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_prog; then if test $ac_prog = install && grep dspmsg $ac_dir/$ac_prog >/dev/null 2>&1; then # AIX install. It has an incompatible calling convention. : else ac_cv_path_install="$ac_dir/$ac_prog -c" break 2 fi fi done ;; esac done IFS="$ac_save_IFS" fi if test "${ac_cv_path_install+set}" = set; then INSTALL="$ac_cv_path_install" else # As a last resort, use the slow shell script. We don't cache a # path for INSTALL within a source directory, because that will # break other packages using the cache if that directory is # removed, or if the path is relative. INSTALL="$ac_install_sh" fi fi echo "$ac_t""$INSTALL" 1>&6 # Use test -z because SunOS4 sh mishandles braces in ${var-val}. # It thinks the first close brace ends the variable substitution. test -z "$INSTALL_PROGRAM" && INSTALL_PROGRAM='${INSTALL}' test -z "$INSTALL_SCRIPT" && INSTALL_SCRIPT='${INSTALL_PROGRAM}' test -z "$INSTALL_DATA" && INSTALL_DATA='${INSTALL} -m 644' echo $ac_n "checking whether ln -s works""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1107: checking whether ln -s works" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_LN_S'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else rm -f conftestdata if ln -s X conftestdata 2>/dev/null then rm -f conftestdata ac_cv_prog_LN_S="ln -s" else ac_cv_prog_LN_S=ln fi fi LN_S="$ac_cv_prog_LN_S" if test "$ac_cv_prog_LN_S" = "ln -s"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi # Extract the first word of "ranlib", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy ranlib; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1130: checking for $ac_word" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_RANLIB'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else if test -n "$RANLIB"; then ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="$RANLIB" # Let the user override the test. else IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":" ac_dummy="$PATH" for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="ranlib" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB" && ac_cv_prog_RANLIB=":" fi fi RANLIB="$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB" if test -n "$RANLIB"; then echo "$ac_t""$RANLIB" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi # Extract the first word of "perl", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy perl; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1161: checking for $ac_word" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_PERL'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else case "$PERL" in /*) ac_cv_path_PERL="$PERL" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; ?:/*) ac_cv_path_PERL="$PERL" # Let the user override the test with a dos path. ;; *) IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":" ac_dummy="/usr/bin:/usr/local/bin:/opt/bin:/usr/contrib/bin" for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_path_PERL="$ac_dir/$ac_word" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_path_PERL" && ac_cv_path_PERL="/usr/local/bin/perl" ;; esac fi PERL="$ac_cv_path_PERL" if test -n "$PERL"; then echo "$ac_t""$PERL" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi echo $ac_n "checking how to run the C preprocessor""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1199: checking how to run the C preprocessor" >&5 # On Suns, sometimes $CPP names a directory. if test -n "$CPP" && test -d "$CPP"; then CPP= fi if test -z "$CPP"; then if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CPP'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else # This must be in double quotes, not single quotes, because CPP may get # substituted into the Makefile and "${CC-cc}" will confuse make. CPP="${CC-cc} -E" # On the NeXT, cc -E runs the code through the compiler's parser, # not just through cpp. cat > conftest.$ac_ext < Syntax Error EOF ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out" { (eval echo configure:1220: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; } ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"` if test -z "$ac_err"; then : else echo "$ac_err" >&5 echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* CPP="${CC-cc} -E -traditional-cpp" cat > conftest.$ac_ext < Syntax Error EOF ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out" { (eval echo configure:1237: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; } ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"` if test -z "$ac_err"; then : else echo "$ac_err" >&5 echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* CPP="${CC-cc} -nologo -E" cat > conftest.$ac_ext < Syntax Error EOF ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out" { (eval echo configure:1254: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; } ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"` if test -z "$ac_err"; then : else echo "$ac_err" >&5 echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* CPP=/lib/cpp fi rm -f conftest* fi rm -f conftest* fi rm -f conftest* ac_cv_prog_CPP="$CPP" fi CPP="$ac_cv_prog_CPP" else ac_cv_prog_CPP="$CPP" fi echo "$ac_t""$CPP" 1>&6 echo $ac_n "checking for ANSI C header files""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1279: checking for ANSI C header files" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_stdc'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #include #include #include EOF ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out" { (eval echo configure:1292: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; } ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"` if test -z "$ac_err"; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_stdc=yes else echo "$ac_err" >&5 echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_stdc=no fi rm -f conftest* if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then # SunOS 4.x string.h does not declare mem*, contrary to ANSI. cat > conftest.$ac_ext < EOF if (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>&5 | egrep "memchr" >/dev/null 2>&1; then : else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_stdc=no fi rm -f conftest* fi if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then # ISC 2.0.2 stdlib.h does not declare free, contrary to ANSI. cat > conftest.$ac_ext < EOF if (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>&5 | egrep "free" >/dev/null 2>&1; then : else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_stdc=no fi rm -f conftest* fi if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then # /bin/cc in Irix-4.0.5 gets non-ANSI ctype macros unless using -ansi. if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then : else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #define ISLOWER(c) ('a' <= (c) && (c) <= 'z') #define TOUPPER(c) (ISLOWER(c) ? 'A' + ((c) - 'a') : (c)) #define XOR(e, f) (((e) && !(f)) || (!(e) && (f))) int main () { int i; for (i = 0; i < 256; i++) if (XOR (islower (i), ISLOWER (i)) || toupper (i) != TOUPPER (i)) exit(2); exit (0); } EOF if { (eval echo configure:1359: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext} && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null then : else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -fr conftest* ac_cv_header_stdc=no fi rm -fr conftest* fi fi fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_header_stdc" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define STDC_HEADERS 1 EOF fi echo $ac_n "checking whether stat file-mode macros are broken""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1383: checking whether stat file-mode macros are broken" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_stat_broken'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #include #if defined(S_ISBLK) && defined(S_IFDIR) # if S_ISBLK (S_IFDIR) You lose. # endif #endif #if defined(S_ISBLK) && defined(S_IFCHR) # if S_ISBLK (S_IFCHR) You lose. # endif #endif #if defined(S_ISLNK) && defined(S_IFREG) # if S_ISLNK (S_IFREG) You lose. # endif #endif #if defined(S_ISSOCK) && defined(S_IFREG) # if S_ISSOCK (S_IFREG) You lose. # endif #endif EOF if (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>&5 | egrep "You lose" >/dev/null 2>&1; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_stat_broken=yes else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_stat_broken=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_header_stat_broken" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_header_stat_broken = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define STAT_MACROS_BROKEN 1 EOF fi echo $ac_n "checking whether time.h and sys/time.h may both be included""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1439: checking whether time.h and sys/time.h may both be included" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_time'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #include #include int main() { struct tm *tp; ; return 0; } EOF if { (eval echo configure:1453: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_time=yes else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_time=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_header_time" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_header_time = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define TIME_WITH_SYS_TIME 1 EOF fi echo $ac_n "checking whether struct tm is in sys/time.h or time.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1474: checking whether struct tm is in sys/time.h or time.h" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_struct_tm'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #include int main() { struct tm *tp; tp->tm_sec; ; return 0; } EOF if { (eval echo configure:1487: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_struct_tm=time.h else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_struct_tm=sys/time.h fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_struct_tm" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_struct_tm = sys/time.h; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define TM_IN_SYS_TIME 1 EOF fi echo $ac_n "checking for tm_zone in struct tm""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1508: checking for tm_zone in struct tm" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_struct_tm_zone'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #include <$ac_cv_struct_tm> int main() { struct tm tm; tm.tm_zone; ; return 0; } EOF if { (eval echo configure:1521: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_struct_tm_zone=yes else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_struct_tm_zone=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_struct_tm_zone" 1>&6 if test "$ac_cv_struct_tm_zone" = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_TM_ZONE 1 EOF else echo $ac_n "checking for tzname""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1541: checking for tzname" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_var_tzname'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #ifndef tzname /* For SGI. */ extern char *tzname[]; /* RS6000 and others reject char **tzname. */ #endif int main() { atoi(*tzname); ; return 0; } EOF if { (eval echo configure:1556: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_var_tzname=yes else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_var_tzname=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_var_tzname" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_var_tzname = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_TZNAME 1 EOF fi fi for ac_hdr in fcntl.h limits.h unistd.h do ac_safe=`echo "$ac_hdr" | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'` echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_hdr""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1581: checking for $ac_hdr" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_$ac_safe'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < EOF ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out" { (eval echo configure:1591: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; } ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"` if test -z "$ac_err"; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=yes" else echo "$ac_err" >&5 echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_header_'$ac_safe`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 ac_tr_hdr=HAVE_`echo $ac_hdr | sed 'y%abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz./-%ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ___%'` cat >> confdefs.h <&6 fi done echo $ac_n "checking for working const""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1620: checking for working const" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_c_const'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext <j = 5; } { /* ULTRIX-32 V3.1 (Rev 9) vcc rejects this */ const int foo = 10; } ; return 0; } EOF if { (eval echo configure:1674: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_c_const=yes else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_c_const=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_c_const" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_c_const = no; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define const EOF fi echo $ac_n "checking for size_t""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1695: checking for size_t" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_type_size_t'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #if STDC_HEADERS #include #include #endif EOF if (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>&5 | egrep "(^|[^a-zA-Z_0-9])size_t[^a-zA-Z_0-9]" >/dev/null 2>&1; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_type_size_t=yes else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_type_size_t=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_type_size_t" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_type_size_t = no; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define size_t unsigned EOF fi echo $ac_n "checking whether struct tm is in sys/time.h or time.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1728: checking whether struct tm is in sys/time.h or time.h" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_struct_tm'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #include int main() { struct tm *tp; tp->tm_sec; ; return 0; } EOF if { (eval echo configure:1741: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_struct_tm=time.h else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_struct_tm=sys/time.h fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_struct_tm" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_struct_tm = sys/time.h; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define TM_IN_SYS_TIME 1 EOF fi echo $ac_n "checking for strftime""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1764: checking for strftime" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_strftime'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ /* We use char because int might match the return type of a gcc2 builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply. */ char strftime(); int main() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_strftime) || defined (__stub___strftime) choke me #else strftime(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if { (eval echo configure:1792: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_strftime=yes" else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_strftime=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'strftime`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_STRFTIME 1 EOF else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 # strftime is in -lintl on SCO UNIX. echo $ac_n "checking for strftime in -lintl""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1814: checking for strftime in -lintl" >&5 ac_lib_var=`echo intl'_'strftime | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'` if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else ac_save_LIBS="$LIBS" LIBS="-lintl $LIBS" cat > conftest.$ac_ext <&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=yes" else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=no" fi rm -f conftest* LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS" fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_lib_'$ac_lib_var`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_STRFTIME 1 EOF LIBS="-lintl $LIBS" else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi fi echo $ac_n "checking for vprintf""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1860: checking for vprintf" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_vprintf'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ /* We use char because int might match the return type of a gcc2 builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply. */ char vprintf(); int main() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_vprintf) || defined (__stub___vprintf) choke me #else vprintf(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if { (eval echo configure:1888: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_vprintf=yes" else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_vprintf=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'vprintf`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_VPRINTF 1 EOF else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi if test "$ac_cv_func_vprintf" != yes; then echo $ac_n "checking for _doprnt""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1912: checking for _doprnt" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func__doprnt'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ /* We use char because int might match the return type of a gcc2 builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply. */ char _doprnt(); int main() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub__doprnt) || defined (__stub____doprnt) choke me #else _doprnt(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if { (eval echo configure:1940: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func__doprnt=yes" else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func__doprnt=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'_doprnt`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_DOPRNT 1 EOF else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi fi for ac_func in mkdir mktime putenv do echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_func""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:1967: checking for $ac_func" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_$ac_func'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ /* We use char because int might match the return type of a gcc2 builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply. */ char $ac_func(); int main() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_$ac_func) || defined (__stub___$ac_func) choke me #else $ac_func(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if { (eval echo configure:1995: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=yes" else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'$ac_func`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 ac_tr_func=HAVE_`echo $ac_func | tr 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ'` cat >> confdefs.h <&6 fi done for ac_func in strptime localtime_r do echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_func""... $ac_c" 1>&6 echo "configure:2022: checking for $ac_func" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_$ac_func'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ /* We use char because int might match the return type of a gcc2 builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply. */ char $ac_func(); int main() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_$ac_func) || defined (__stub___$ac_func) choke me #else $ac_func(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if { (eval echo configure:2050: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=yes" else echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5 cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5 rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'$ac_func`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 ac_tr_func=HAVE_`echo $ac_func | tr 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ'` cat >> confdefs.h <&6 LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS ${ac_func}.${ac_objext}" fi done trap '' 1 2 15 cat > confcache <<\EOF # This file is a shell script that caches the results of configure # tests run on this system so they can be shared between configure # scripts and configure runs. It is not useful on other systems. # If it contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it. # # By default, configure uses ./config.cache as the cache file, # creating it if it does not exist already. You can give configure # the --cache-file=FILE option to use a different cache file; that is # what configure does when it calls configure scripts in # subdirectories, so they share the cache. # Giving --cache-file=/dev/null disables caching, for debugging configure. # config.status only pays attention to the cache file if you give it the # --recheck option to rerun configure. # EOF # The following way of writing the cache mishandles newlines in values, # but we know of no workaround that is simple, portable, and efficient. # So, don't put newlines in cache variables' values. # Ultrix sh set writes to stderr and can't be redirected directly, # and sets the high bit in the cache file unless we assign to the vars. (set) 2>&1 | case `(ac_space=' '; set | grep ac_space) 2>&1` in *ac_space=\ *) # `set' does not quote correctly, so add quotes (double-quote substitution # turns \\\\ into \\, and sed turns \\ into \). sed -n \ -e "s/'/'\\\\''/g" \ -e "s/^\\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*_cv_[a-zA-Z0-9_]*\\)=\\(.*\\)/\\1=\${\\1='\\2'}/p" ;; *) # `set' quotes correctly as required by POSIX, so do not add quotes. sed -n -e 's/^\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*_cv_[a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=\(.*\)/\1=${\1=\2}/p' ;; esac >> confcache if cmp -s $cache_file confcache; then : else if test -w $cache_file; then echo "updating cache $cache_file" cat confcache > $cache_file else echo "not updating unwritable cache $cache_file" fi fi rm -f confcache trap 'rm -fr conftest* confdefs* core core.* *.core $ac_clean_files; exit 1' 1 2 15 test "x$prefix" = xNONE && prefix=$ac_default_prefix # Let make expand exec_prefix. test "x$exec_prefix" = xNONE && exec_prefix='${prefix}' # Any assignment to VPATH causes Sun make to only execute # the first set of double-colon rules, so remove it if not needed. # If there is a colon in the path, we need to keep it. if test "x$srcdir" = x.; then ac_vpsub='/^[ ]*VPATH[ ]*=[^:]*$/d' fi trap 'rm -f $CONFIG_STATUS conftest*; exit 1' 1 2 15 # Transform confdefs.h into DEFS. # Protect against shell expansion while executing Makefile rules. # Protect against Makefile macro expansion. cat > conftest.defs <<\EOF s%#define \([A-Za-z_][A-Za-z0-9_]*\) *\(.*\)%-D\1=\2%g s%[ `~#$^&*(){}\\|;'"<>?]%\\&%g s%\[%\\&%g s%\]%\\&%g s%\$%$$%g EOF DEFS=`sed -f conftest.defs confdefs.h | tr '\012' ' '` rm -f conftest.defs # Without the "./", some shells look in PATH for config.status. : ${CONFIG_STATUS=./config.status} echo creating $CONFIG_STATUS rm -f $CONFIG_STATUS cat > $CONFIG_STATUS </dev/null | sed 1q`: # # $0 $ac_configure_args # # Compiler output produced by configure, useful for debugging # configure, is in ./config.log if it exists. ac_cs_usage="Usage: $CONFIG_STATUS [--recheck] [--version] [--help]" for ac_option do case "\$ac_option" in -recheck | --recheck | --rechec | --reche | --rech | --rec | --re | --r) echo "running \${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $0 $ac_configure_args --no-create --no-recursion" exec \${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $0 $ac_configure_args --no-create --no-recursion ;; -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | --ver | --ve | --v) echo "$CONFIG_STATUS generated by autoconf version 2.13" exit 0 ;; -help | --help | --hel | --he | --h) echo "\$ac_cs_usage"; exit 0 ;; *) echo "\$ac_cs_usage"; exit 1 ;; esac done ac_given_srcdir=$srcdir ac_given_INSTALL="$INSTALL" trap 'rm -fr `echo "Makefile lib/Makefile src/Makefile doc/Makefile testsuite/Makefile src/cronosplit" | sed "s/:[^ ]*//g"` conftest*; exit 1' 1 2 15 EOF cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS < conftest.subs <<\\CEOF $ac_vpsub $extrasub s%@SHELL@%$SHELL%g s%@CFLAGS@%$CFLAGS%g s%@CPPFLAGS@%$CPPFLAGS%g s%@CXXFLAGS@%$CXXFLAGS%g s%@FFLAGS@%$FFLAGS%g s%@DEFS@%$DEFS%g s%@LDFLAGS@%$LDFLAGS%g s%@LIBS@%$LIBS%g s%@exec_prefix@%$exec_prefix%g s%@prefix@%$prefix%g s%@program_transform_name@%$program_transform_name%g s%@bindir@%$bindir%g s%@sbindir@%$sbindir%g s%@libexecdir@%$libexecdir%g s%@datadir@%$datadir%g s%@sysconfdir@%$sysconfdir%g s%@sharedstatedir@%$sharedstatedir%g s%@localstatedir@%$localstatedir%g s%@libdir@%$libdir%g s%@includedir@%$includedir%g s%@oldincludedir@%$oldincludedir%g s%@infodir@%$infodir%g s%@mandir@%$mandir%g s%@INSTALL_PROGRAM@%$INSTALL_PROGRAM%g s%@INSTALL_SCRIPT@%$INSTALL_SCRIPT%g s%@INSTALL_DATA@%$INSTALL_DATA%g s%@PACKAGE@%$PACKAGE%g s%@VERSION@%$VERSION%g s%@ACLOCAL@%$ACLOCAL%g s%@AUTOCONF@%$AUTOCONF%g s%@AUTOMAKE@%$AUTOMAKE%g s%@AUTOHEADER@%$AUTOHEADER%g s%@MAKEINFO@%$MAKEINFO%g s%@SET_MAKE@%$SET_MAKE%g s%@CC@%$CC%g s%@LN_S@%$LN_S%g s%@RANLIB@%$RANLIB%g s%@PERL@%$PERL%g s%@CPP@%$CPP%g s%@LIBOBJS@%$LIBOBJS%g CEOF EOF cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF # Split the substitutions into bite-sized pieces for seds with # small command number limits, like on Digital OSF/1 and HP-UX. ac_max_sed_cmds=90 # Maximum number of lines to put in a sed script. ac_file=1 # Number of current file. ac_beg=1 # First line for current file. ac_end=$ac_max_sed_cmds # Line after last line for current file. ac_more_lines=: ac_sed_cmds="" while $ac_more_lines; do if test $ac_beg -gt 1; then sed "1,${ac_beg}d; ${ac_end}q" conftest.subs > conftest.s$ac_file else sed "${ac_end}q" conftest.subs > conftest.s$ac_file fi if test ! -s conftest.s$ac_file; then ac_more_lines=false rm -f conftest.s$ac_file else if test -z "$ac_sed_cmds"; then ac_sed_cmds="sed -f conftest.s$ac_file" else ac_sed_cmds="$ac_sed_cmds | sed -f conftest.s$ac_file" fi ac_file=`expr $ac_file + 1` ac_beg=$ac_end ac_end=`expr $ac_end + $ac_max_sed_cmds` fi done if test -z "$ac_sed_cmds"; then ac_sed_cmds=cat fi EOF cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF for ac_file in .. $CONFIG_FILES; do if test "x$ac_file" != x..; then # Support "outfile[:infile[:infile...]]", defaulting infile="outfile.in". case "$ac_file" in *:*) ac_file_in=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%[^:]*:%%'` ac_file=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%:.*%%'` ;; *) ac_file_in="${ac_file}.in" ;; esac # Adjust a relative srcdir, top_srcdir, and INSTALL for subdirectories. # Remove last slash and all that follows it. Not all systems have dirname. ac_dir=`echo $ac_file|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'` if test "$ac_dir" != "$ac_file" && test "$ac_dir" != .; then # The file is in a subdirectory. test ! -d "$ac_dir" && mkdir "$ac_dir" ac_dir_suffix="/`echo $ac_dir|sed 's%^\./%%'`" # A "../" for each directory in $ac_dir_suffix. ac_dots=`echo $ac_dir_suffix|sed 's%/[^/]*%../%g'` else ac_dir_suffix= ac_dots= fi case "$ac_given_srcdir" in .) srcdir=. if test -z "$ac_dots"; then top_srcdir=. else top_srcdir=`echo $ac_dots|sed 's%/$%%'`; fi ;; /*) srcdir="$ac_given_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix"; top_srcdir="$ac_given_srcdir" ;; *) # Relative path. srcdir="$ac_dots$ac_given_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix" top_srcdir="$ac_dots$ac_given_srcdir" ;; esac case "$ac_given_INSTALL" in [/$]*) INSTALL="$ac_given_INSTALL" ;; *) INSTALL="$ac_dots$ac_given_INSTALL" ;; esac echo creating "$ac_file" rm -f "$ac_file" configure_input="Generated automatically from `echo $ac_file_in|sed 's%.*/%%'` by configure." case "$ac_file" in *Makefile*) ac_comsub="1i\\ # $configure_input" ;; *) ac_comsub= ;; esac ac_file_inputs=`echo $ac_file_in|sed -e "s%^%$ac_given_srcdir/%" -e "s%:% $ac_given_srcdir/%g"` sed -e "$ac_comsub s%@configure_input@%$configure_input%g s%@srcdir@%$srcdir%g s%@top_srcdir@%$top_srcdir%g s%@INSTALL@%$INSTALL%g " $ac_file_inputs | (eval "$ac_sed_cmds") > $ac_file fi; done rm -f conftest.s* EOF cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF exit 0 EOF chmod +x $CONFIG_STATUS rm -fr confdefs* $ac_clean_files test "$no_create" = yes || ${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $CONFIG_STATUS || exit 1 cronolog-1.6.2/configure.in0000644000031100003110000000342207274303672011327 dnl Template file for GNU Autoconf dnl dnl Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script. dnl dnl Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. dnl dnl This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify dnl it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by dnl the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or dnl (at your option) any later version. dnl dnl This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, dnl but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of dnl MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the dnl GNU General Public License for more details. dnl dnl You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License dnl along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software dnl Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. dnl dnl $Id: configure.in,v 1.8 1999/12/20 09:03:50 andrew Exp $ dnl AC_REVISION($Revision: 1.8 $) AC_INIT(COPYING) AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(cronolog, 1.6.2) dnl PACKAGE and VERSION initialized here!! AC_ARG_PROGRAM dnl Checks for programs. AC_PROG_CC AC_PROG_INSTALL AC_PROG_LN_S AC_PROG_RANLIB AC_PATH_PROG(PERL, perl, /usr/local/bin/perl, /usr/bin:/usr/local/bin:/opt/bin:/usr/contrib/bin) dnl Checks for libraries. dnl Checks for header files. AC_HEADER_STDC AC_HEADER_STAT AC_HEADER_TIME AC_STRUCT_TM AC_STRUCT_TIMEZONE AC_CHECK_HEADERS(fcntl.h limits.h unistd.h) dnl Checks for typedefs, structures, and compiler characteristics. AC_C_CONST AC_TYPE_SIZE_T AC_STRUCT_TM dnl Checks for library functions. AC_FUNC_STRFTIME AC_FUNC_VPRINTF AC_CHECK_FUNCS(mkdir mktime putenv) AC_REPLACE_FUNCS(strptime localtime_r) AC_OUTPUT(Makefile lib/Makefile src/Makefile doc/Makefile testsuite/Makefile src/cronosplit) cronolog-1.6.2/install-sh0000755000031100003110000001272106322767730011026 #! /bin/sh # # install - install a program, script, or datafile # This comes from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh). # # Copyright 1991 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology # # Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its # documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that # the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that # copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting # documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or # publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, # written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the # suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" # without express or implied warranty. # # Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent # `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it # when there is no Makefile. # # This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written # from scratch. It can only install one file at a time, a restriction # shared with many OS's install programs. # set DOITPROG to echo to test this script # Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it. doit="${DOITPROG-}" # put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars. mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}" cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}" chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}" chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}" chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}" stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}" rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}" mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}" transformbasename="" transform_arg="" instcmd="$mvprog" chmodcmd="$chmodprog 0755" chowncmd="" chgrpcmd="" stripcmd="" rmcmd="$rmprog -f" mvcmd="$mvprog" src="" dst="" dir_arg="" while [ x"$1" != x ]; do case $1 in -c) instcmd="$cpprog" shift continue;; -d) dir_arg=true shift continue;; -m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2" shift shift continue;; -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2" shift shift continue;; -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2" shift shift continue;; -s) stripcmd="$stripprog" shift continue;; -t=*) transformarg=`echo $1 | sed 's/-t=//'` shift continue;; -b=*) transformbasename=`echo $1 | sed 's/-b=//'` shift continue;; *) if [ x"$src" = x ] then src=$1 else # this colon is to work around a 386BSD /bin/sh bug : dst=$1 fi shift continue;; esac done if [ x"$src" = x ] then echo "install: no input file specified" exit 1 else true fi if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]; then dst=$src src="" if [ -d $dst ]; then instcmd=: else instcmd=mkdir fi else # Waiting for this to be detected by the "$instcmd $src $dsttmp" command # might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad # if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'. if [ -f $src -o -d $src ] then true else echo "install: $src does not exist" exit 1 fi if [ x"$dst" = x ] then echo "install: no destination specified" exit 1 else true fi # If destination is a directory, append the input filename; if your system # does not like double slashes in filenames, you may need to add some logic if [ -d $dst ] then dst="$dst"/`basename $src` else true fi fi ## this sed command emulates the dirname command dstdir=`echo $dst | sed -e 's,[^/]*$,,;s,/$,,;s,^$,.,'` # Make sure that the destination directory exists. # this part is taken from Noah Friedman's mkinstalldirs script # Skip lots of stat calls in the usual case. if [ ! -d "$dstdir" ]; then defaultIFS=' ' IFS="${IFS-${defaultIFS}}" oIFS="${IFS}" # Some sh's can't handle IFS=/ for some reason. IFS='%' set - `echo ${dstdir} | sed -e 's@/@%@g' -e 's@^%@/@'` IFS="${oIFS}" pathcomp='' while [ $# -ne 0 ] ; do pathcomp="${pathcomp}${1}" shift if [ ! -d "${pathcomp}" ] ; then $mkdirprog "${pathcomp}" else true fi pathcomp="${pathcomp}/" done fi if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ] then $doit $instcmd $dst && if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dst; else true ; fi && if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dst; else true ; fi && if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dst; else true ; fi && if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dst; else true ; fi else # If we're going to rename the final executable, determine the name now. if [ x"$transformarg" = x ] then dstfile=`basename $dst` else dstfile=`basename $dst $transformbasename | sed $transformarg`$transformbasename fi # don't allow the sed command to completely eliminate the filename if [ x"$dstfile" = x ] then dstfile=`basename $dst` else true fi # Make a temp file name in the proper directory. dsttmp=$dstdir/#inst.$$# # Move or copy the file name to the temp name $doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp && trap "rm -f ${dsttmp}" 0 && # and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits # If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing. If we want to # ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore # errors from the above "$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp" command. if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && # Now rename the file to the real destination. $doit $rmcmd -f $dstdir/$dstfile && $doit $mvcmd $dsttmp $dstdir/$dstfile fi && exit 0 cronolog-1.6.2/missing0000755000000000000000000001421307133036363010375 #! /bin/sh # Common stub for a few missing GNU programs while installing. # Copyright (C) 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # Franc,ois Pinard , 1996. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA # 02111-1307, USA. if test $# -eq 0; then echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information" exit 1 fi case "$1" in -h|--h|--he|--hel|--help) echo "\ $0 [OPTION]... PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]... Handle \`PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...' for when PROGRAM is missing, or return an error status if there is no known handling for PROGRAM. Options: -h, --help display this help and exit -v, --version output version information and exit Supported PROGRAM values: aclocal touch file \`aclocal.m4' autoconf touch file \`configure' autoheader touch file \`config.h.in' automake touch all \`Makefile.in' files bison create \`y.tab.[ch]', if possible, from existing .[ch] flex create \`lex.yy.c', if possible, from existing .c lex create \`lex.yy.c', if possible, from existing .c makeinfo touch the output file yacc create \`y.tab.[ch]', if possible, from existing .[ch]" ;; -v|--v|--ve|--ver|--vers|--versi|--versio|--version) echo "missing - GNU libit 0.0" ;; -*) echo 1>&2 "$0: Unknown \`$1' option" echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information" exit 1 ;; aclocal) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if you modified \`acinclude.m4' or \`configure.in'. You might want to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." touch aclocal.m4 ;; autoconf) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if you modified \`configure.in'. You might want to install the \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." touch configure ;; autoheader) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if you modified \`acconfig.h' or \`configure.in'. You might want to install the \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." files=`sed -n 's/^[ ]*A[CM]_CONFIG_HEADER(\([^)]*\)).*/\1/p' configure.in` test -z "$files" && files="config.h" touch_files= for f in $files; do case "$f" in *:*) touch_files="$touch_files "`echo "$f" | sed -e 's/^[^:]*://' -e 's/:.*//'`;; *) touch_files="$touch_files $f.in";; esac done touch $touch_files ;; automake) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if you modified \`Makefile.am', \`acinclude.m4' or \`configure.in'. You might want to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." find . -type f -name Makefile.am -print | sed 's/\.am$/.in/' | while read f; do touch "$f"; done ;; bison|yacc) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if you modified a \`.y' file. You may need the \`Bison' package in order for those modifications to take effect. You can get \`Bison' from any GNU archive site." rm -f y.tab.c y.tab.h if [ $# -ne 1 ]; then eval LASTARG="\${$#}" case "$LASTARG" in *.y) SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/y$/c/'` if [ -f "$SRCFILE" ]; then cp "$SRCFILE" y.tab.c fi SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/y$/h/'` if [ -f "$SRCFILE" ]; then cp "$SRCFILE" y.tab.h fi ;; esac fi if [ ! -f y.tab.h ]; then echo >y.tab.h fi if [ ! -f y.tab.c ]; then echo 'main() { return 0; }' >y.tab.c fi ;; lex|flex) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if you modified a \`.l' file. You may need the \`Flex' package in order for those modifications to take effect. You can get \`Flex' from any GNU archive site." rm -f lex.yy.c if [ $# -ne 1 ]; then eval LASTARG="\${$#}" case "$LASTARG" in *.l) SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/l$/c/'` if [ -f "$SRCFILE" ]; then cp "$SRCFILE" lex.yy.c fi ;; esac fi if [ ! -f lex.yy.c ]; then echo 'main() { return 0; }' >lex.yy.c fi ;; makeinfo) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if you modified a \`.texi' or \`.texinfo' file, or any other file indirectly affecting the aspect of the manual. The spurious call might also be the consequence of using a buggy \`make' (AIX, DU, IRIX). You might want to install the \`Texinfo' package or the \`GNU make' package. Grab either from any GNU archive site." file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*-o \([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'` if test -z "$file"; then file=`echo "$*" | sed 's/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/'` file=`sed -n '/^@setfilename/ { s/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/; p; q; }' $file` fi touch $file ;; *) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is needed, and you do not seem to have it handy on your system. You might have modified some files without having the proper tools for further handling them. Check the \`README' file, it often tells you about the needed prerequirements for installing this package. You may also peek at any GNU archive site, in case some other package would contain this missing \`$1' program." exit 1 ;; esac exit 0 cronolog-1.6.2/mkinstalldirs0000755000031100003110000000133106322770130011607 #! /bin/sh # mkinstalldirs --- make directory hierarchy # Author: Noah Friedman # Created: 1993-05-16 # Public domain # $Id: mkinstalldirs,v 1.1 1997/04/09 19:39:04 andrew Exp $ errstatus=0 for file do set fnord `echo ":$file" | sed -ne 's/^:\//#/;s/^://;s/\// /g;s/^#/\//;p'` shift pathcomp= for d do pathcomp="$pathcomp$d" case "$pathcomp" in -* ) pathcomp=./$pathcomp ;; esac if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then echo "mkdir $pathcomp" 1>&2 mkdir "$pathcomp" || lasterr=$? if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then errstatus=$lasterr fi fi pathcomp="$pathcomp/" done done exit $errstatus # mkinstalldirs ends here cronolog-1.6.2/cronolog.spec0000644000031100003110000000322507274470000011503 %define name cronolog %define version 1.6.2 %define release 1 %define group System Networking/Daemons Summary: a flexible log file rotation program for Apache Name: %{name} Version: %{version} Release: %{release} Copyright: Apache license Group: %{group} Packager: Andrew Ford URL: http://www.ford-mason.co.uk/resources/cronolog/ Source: http://www.ford-mason.co.uk/resources/cronolog/cronolog-%version.tar.gz BuildRoot: /tmp/%{name}-root %description "cronolog" is a simple program that reads log messages from its input and writes them to a set of output files, the names of which are constructed using template and the current date and time. The template uses the same format specifiers as the Unix date command (which are the same as the standard C strftime library function). %changelog %prep %setup -n %{name}-%{version} %build ./configure make %install rm -rf $RPM_BUILD_ROOT mkdir -p $RPM_BUILD_ROOT/usr/share/doc/%{name}-${RPM_PACKAGE_VERSION} -m 755 make prefix=$RPM_BUILD_ROOT/usr mandir=$RPM_BUILD_ROOT/usr/share/man install install -m 644 README $RPM_BUILD_ROOT/usr/share/doc/%name-${RPM_PACKAGE_VERSION} #install -m 644 $RPM_SOURCE_DIR/doc/cronolog.1m $RPM_BUILD_ROOT/usr/man/man1/cronolog.1 #install -m 755 $RPM_SOURCE_DIR/src/cronolog $RPM_BUILD_ROOT/usr/sbin/cronolog #strip $RPM_BUILD_ROOT/usr/sbin/* || echo Ignored strip on a non-binary file %post %preun %postun %clean rm -rf $RPM_BUILD_ROOT %files #%attr(-,root,root) /usr/share/doc/%{name}-%{version}/README %attr(-,root,root) /usr/sbin/cronolog %attr(-,root,root) /usr/sbin/cronosplit #%files man %attr(644,root,root) /usr/share/man/man1/*.1* %doc README cronolog-1.6.2/lib/0000777000031100003110000000000007274470013007641 5cronolog-1.6.2/lib/Makefile.in0000664000031100003110000001477307274470012011637 # Makefile.in generated automatically by automake 1.4 from Makefile.am # Copyright (C) 1994, 1995-8, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without # even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A # PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SHELL = @SHELL@ srcdir = @srcdir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ prefix = @prefix@ exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ bindir = @bindir@ sbindir = @sbindir@ libexecdir = @libexecdir@ datadir = @datadir@ sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ localstatedir = @localstatedir@ libdir = @libdir@ infodir = @infodir@ mandir = @mandir@ includedir = @includedir@ oldincludedir = /usr/include DESTDIR = pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ top_builddir = .. ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ INSTALL = @INSTALL@ INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ $(AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS) INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ transform = @program_transform_name@ NORMAL_INSTALL = : PRE_INSTALL = : POST_INSTALL = : NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : PRE_UNINSTALL = : POST_UNINSTALL = : CC = @CC@ LN_S = @LN_S@ MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ PERL = @PERL@ RANLIB = @RANLIB@ VERSION = @VERSION@ noinst_LIBRARIES = libutil.a libutil_a_SOURCES = getopt.c getopt1.c getopt.h libutil_a_LIBADD = @LIBOBJS@ EXTRA_DIST = localtime_r.c strptime.c mkinstalldirs = $(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = LIBRARIES = $(noinst_LIBRARIES) DEFS = @DEFS@ -I. -I$(srcdir) CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ LIBS = @LIBS@ libutil_a_DEPENDENCIES = @LIBOBJS@ libutil_a_OBJECTS = getopt.o getopt1.o AR = ar CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ COMPILE = $(CC) $(DEFS) $(INCLUDES) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) $(CPPFLAGS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) CCLD = $(CC) LINK = $(CCLD) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) -o $@ DIST_COMMON = Makefile.am Makefile.in localtime_r.c strptime.c DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) TAR = gtar GZIP_ENV = --best SOURCES = $(libutil_a_SOURCES) OBJECTS = $(libutil_a_OBJECTS) all: all-redirect .SUFFIXES: .SUFFIXES: .S .c .o .s $(srcdir)/Makefile.in: Makefile.am $(top_srcdir)/configure.in $(ACLOCAL_M4) cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu --include-deps lib/Makefile Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status cd $(top_builddir) \ && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status mostlyclean-noinstLIBRARIES: clean-noinstLIBRARIES: -test -z "$(noinst_LIBRARIES)" || rm -f $(noinst_LIBRARIES) distclean-noinstLIBRARIES: maintainer-clean-noinstLIBRARIES: .c.o: $(COMPILE) -c $< .s.o: $(COMPILE) -c $< .S.o: $(COMPILE) -c $< mostlyclean-compile: -rm -f *.o core *.core clean-compile: distclean-compile: -rm -f *.tab.c maintainer-clean-compile: libutil.a: $(libutil_a_OBJECTS) $(libutil_a_DEPENDENCIES) -rm -f libutil.a $(AR) cru libutil.a $(libutil_a_OBJECTS) $(libutil_a_LIBADD) $(RANLIB) libutil.a tags: TAGS ID: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(LISP) list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do echo $$i; done | \ awk ' { files[$$0] = 1; } \ END { for (i in files) print i; }'`; \ here=`pwd` && cd $(srcdir) \ && mkid -f$$here/ID $$unique $(LISP) TAGS: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) $(LISP) tags=; \ here=`pwd`; \ list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do echo $$i; done | \ awk ' { files[$$0] = 1; } \ END { for (i in files) print i; }'`; \ test -z "$(ETAGS_ARGS)$$unique$(LISP)$$tags" \ || (cd $(srcdir) && etags $(ETAGS_ARGS) $$tags $$unique $(LISP) -o $$here/TAGS) mostlyclean-tags: clean-tags: distclean-tags: -rm -f TAGS ID maintainer-clean-tags: distdir = $(top_builddir)/$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir) subdir = lib distdir: $(DISTFILES) @for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ d=$(srcdir); \ if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ cp -pr $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file; \ else \ test -f $(distdir)/$$file \ || ln $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file 2> /dev/null \ || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file || :; \ fi; \ done getopt.o: getopt.c getopt1.o: getopt1.c getopt.h info-am: info: info-am dvi-am: dvi: dvi-am check-am: all-am check: check-am installcheck-am: installcheck: installcheck-am install-exec-am: install-exec: install-exec-am install-data-am: install-data: install-data-am install-am: all-am @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am install: install-am uninstall-am: uninstall: uninstall-am all-am: Makefile $(LIBRARIES) all-redirect: all-am install-strip: $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS=-s install installdirs: mostlyclean-generic: clean-generic: distclean-generic: -rm -f Makefile $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) -rm -f config.cache config.log stamp-h stamp-h[0-9]* maintainer-clean-generic: mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-noinstLIBRARIES mostlyclean-compile \ mostlyclean-tags mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am clean-am: clean-noinstLIBRARIES clean-compile clean-tags clean-generic \ mostlyclean-am clean: clean-am distclean-am: distclean-noinstLIBRARIES distclean-compile \ distclean-tags distclean-generic clean-am distclean: distclean-am maintainer-clean-am: maintainer-clean-noinstLIBRARIES \ maintainer-clean-compile maintainer-clean-tags \ maintainer-clean-generic distclean-am @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am .PHONY: mostlyclean-noinstLIBRARIES distclean-noinstLIBRARIES \ clean-noinstLIBRARIES maintainer-clean-noinstLIBRARIES \ mostlyclean-compile distclean-compile clean-compile \ maintainer-clean-compile tags mostlyclean-tags distclean-tags \ clean-tags maintainer-clean-tags distdir info-am info dvi-am dvi check \ check-am installcheck-am installcheck install-exec-am install-exec \ install-data-am install-data install-am install uninstall-am uninstall \ all-redirect all-am all installdirs mostlyclean-generic \ distclean-generic clean-generic maintainer-clean-generic clean \ mostlyclean distclean maintainer-clean # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: cronolog-1.6.2/lib/Makefile.am0000644000031100003110000000032606324203302011600 ## Process this file with automake to create Makefile.in noinst_LIBRARIES = libutil.a libutil_a_SOURCES = getopt.c getopt1.c getopt.h libutil_a_LIBADD = @LIBOBJS@ EXTRA_DIST = localtime_r.c strptime.c cronolog-1.6.2/lib/localtime_r.c0000644000031100003110000000075206324203667012223 /* Minimal localtime_r implementation (not reentrant though). * This file is in the public domain. * * Call localtime and if it succeeds copy the contents of the * localtime's static tm structure into the caller's structure. */ #include #include struct tm * localtime_r(const time_t *t, struct tm *ptm) { struct tm *ptms = localtime(t); /* pointer to static structure */ if (ptms) { *ptm = *ptms; return ptm; } else { return 0; } } cronolog-1.6.2/lib/strptime.c0000644000031100003110000004252406323151457011601 /* Convert a string representation of time to a time value. Copyright (C) 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is part of the GNU C Library. Contributed by Ulrich Drepper , 1996. The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ /* XXX This version of the implementation is not really complete. Some of the fields cannot add information alone. But if seeing some of them in the same format (such as year, week and weekday) this is enough information for determining the date. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include #include #include #include #include #ifdef _LIBC # include "../locale/localeinfo.h" #endif #ifndef __P # if defined (__GNUC__) || (defined (__STDC__) && __STDC__) # define __P(args) args # else # define __P(args) () # endif /* GCC. */ #endif /* Not __P. */ #if ! HAVE_LOCALTIME_R && ! defined (localtime_r) #ifdef _LIBC #define localtime_r __localtime_r #else /* Approximate localtime_r as best we can in its absence. */ #define localtime_r my_localtime_r static struct tm *localtime_r __P ((const time_t *, struct tm *)); static struct tm * localtime_r (t, tp) const time_t *t; struct tm *tp; { struct tm *l = localtime (t); if (! l) return 0; *tp = *l; return tp; } #endif /* ! _LIBC */ #endif /* ! HAVE_LOCALTIME_R && ! defined (localtime_r) */ #define match_char(ch1, ch2) if (ch1 != ch2) return NULL #if defined __GNUC__ && __GNUC__ >= 2 # define match_string(cs1, s2) \ ({ size_t len = strlen (cs1); \ int result = strncasecmp ((cs1), (s2), len) == 0; \ if (result) (s2) += len; \ result; }) #else /* Oh come on. Get a reasonable compiler. */ # define match_string(cs1, s2) \ (strncasecmp ((cs1), (s2), strlen (cs1)) ? 0 : ((s2) += strlen (cs1), 1)) #endif /* We intentionally do not use isdigit() for testing because this will lead to problems with the wide character version. */ #define get_number(from, to) \ do { \ val = 0; \ if (*rp < '0' || *rp > '9') \ return NULL; \ do { \ val *= 10; \ val += *rp++ - '0'; \ } while (val * 10 <= to && *rp >= '0' && *rp <= '9'); \ if (val < from || val > to) \ return NULL; \ } while (0) #ifdef _NL_CURRENT # define get_alt_number(from, to) \ do { \ if (*decided != raw) \ { \ const char *alts = _NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, ALT_DIGITS); \ val = 0; \ while (*alts != '\0') \ { \ size_t len = strlen (alts); \ if (strncasecmp (alts, rp, len) == 0) \ break; \ alts = strchr (alts, '\0') + 1; \ ++val; \ } \ if (*alts == '\0') \ { \ if (*decided == loc && val != 0) \ return NULL; \ } \ else \ { \ *decided = loc; \ break; \ } \ } \ get_number (from, to); \ } while (0) #else # define get_alt_number(from, to) \ /* We don't have the alternate representation. */ \ get_number(from, to) #endif #define recursive(new_fmt) \ (*(new_fmt) != '\0' \ && (rp = strptime_internal (rp, (new_fmt), tm, decided)) != NULL) #ifdef _LIBC /* This is defined in locale/C-time.c in the GNU libc. */ extern const struct locale_data _nl_C_LC_TIME; # define weekday_name (&_nl_C_LC_TIME.values[_NL_ITEM_INDEX (DAY_1)].string) # define ab_weekday_name \ (&_nl_C_LC_TIME.values[_NL_ITEM_INDEX (ABDAY_1)].string) # define month_name (&_nl_C_LC_TIME.values[_NL_ITEM_INDEX (MON_1)].string) # define ab_month_name (&_nl_C_LC_TIME.values[_NL_ITEM_INDEX (ABMON_1)].string) # define HERE_D_T_FMT (_nl_C_LC_TIME.values[_NL_ITEM_INDEX (D_T_FMT)].string) # define HERE_D_FMT (_nl_C_LC_TIME.values[_NL_ITEM_INDEX (D_T_FMT)].string) # define HERE_AM_STR (_nl_C_LC_TIME.values[_NL_ITEM_INDEX (AM_STR)].string) # define HERE_PM_STR (_nl_C_LC_TIME.values[_NL_ITEM_INDEX (PM_STR)].string) # define HERE_T_FMT_AMPM \ (_nl_C_LC_TIME.values[_NL_ITEM_INDEX (T_FMT_AMPM)].string) # define HERE_T_FMT (_nl_C_LC_TIME.values[_NL_ITEM_INDEX (T_FMT)].string) #else static char const weekday_name[][10] = { "Sunday", "Monday", "Tuesday", "Wednesday", "Thursday", "Friday", "Saturday" }; static char const ab_weekday_name[][4] = { "Sun", "Mon", "Tue", "Wed", "Thu", "Fri", "Sat" }; static char const month_name[][10] = { "January", "February", "March", "April", "May", "June", "July", "August", "September", "October", "November", "December" }; static char const ab_month_name[][4] = { "Jan", "Feb", "Mar", "Apr", "May", "Jun", "Jul", "Aug", "Sep", "Oct", "Nov", "Dec" }; # define HERE_D_T_FMT "%a %b %e %H:%M:%S %Y" # define HERE_D_FMT "%m/%d/%y" # define HERE_AM_STR "AM" # define HERE_PM_STR "PM" # define HERE_T_FMT_AMPM "%I:%M:%S %p" # define HERE_T_FMT "%H:%M:%S" #endif /* Status of lookup: do we use the locale data or the raw data? */ enum locale_status { not, loc, raw }; static char * strptime_internal __P ((const char *buf, const char *format, struct tm *tm, enum locale_status *decided)); static char * strptime_internal (buf, format, tm, decided) const char *buf; const char *format; struct tm *tm; enum locale_status *decided; { const char *rp; const char *fmt; int cnt; size_t val; int have_I, is_pm; rp = buf; fmt = format; have_I = is_pm = 0; while (*fmt != '\0') { /* A white space in the format string matches 0 more or white space in the input string. */ if (isspace (*fmt)) { while (isspace (*rp)) ++rp; ++fmt; continue; } /* Any character but `%' must be matched by the same character in the iput string. */ if (*fmt != '%') { match_char (*fmt++, *rp++); continue; } ++fmt; #ifndef _NL_CURRENT /* We need this for handling the `E' modifier. */ start_over: #endif switch (*fmt++) { case '%': /* Match the `%' character itself. */ match_char ('%', *rp++); break; case 'a': case 'A': /* Match day of week. */ for (cnt = 0; cnt < 7; ++cnt) { #ifdef _NL_CURRENT if (*decided !=raw) { if (match_string (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, DAY_1 + cnt), rp)) { if (*decided == not && strcmp (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, DAY_1 + cnt), weekday_name[cnt])) *decided = loc; break; } if (match_string (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, ABDAY_1 + cnt), rp)) { if (*decided == not && strcmp (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, ABDAY_1 + cnt), ab_weekday_name[cnt])) *decided = loc; break; } } #endif if (*decided != loc && (match_string (weekday_name[cnt], rp) || match_string (ab_weekday_name[cnt], rp))) { *decided = raw; break; } } if (cnt == 7) /* Does not match a weekday name. */ return NULL; tm->tm_wday = cnt; break; case 'b': case 'B': case 'h': /* Match month name. */ for (cnt = 0; cnt < 12; ++cnt) { #ifdef _NL_CURRENT if (*decided !=raw) { if (match_string (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, MON_1 + cnt), rp)) { if (*decided == not && strcmp (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, MON_1 + cnt), month_name[cnt])) *decided = loc; break; } if (match_string (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, ABMON_1 + cnt), rp)) { if (*decided == not && strcmp (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, ABMON_1 + cnt), ab_month_name[cnt])) *decided = loc; break; } } #endif if (match_string (month_name[cnt], rp) || match_string (ab_month_name[cnt], rp)) { *decided = raw; break; } } if (cnt == 12) /* Does not match a month name. */ return NULL; tm->tm_mon = cnt; break; case 'c': /* Match locale's date and time format. */ #ifdef _NL_CURRENT if (*decided != raw) { if (!recursive (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, D_T_FMT))) { if (*decided == loc) return NULL; } else { if (*decided == not && strcmp (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, D_T_FMT), HERE_D_T_FMT)) *decided = loc; break; } *decided = raw; } #endif if (!recursive (HERE_D_T_FMT)) return NULL; break; case 'C': /* Match century number. */ get_number (0, 99); /* We don't need the number. */ break; case 'd': case 'e': /* Match day of month. */ get_number (1, 31); tm->tm_mday = val; break; case 'x': #ifdef _NL_CURRENT if (*decided != raw) { if (!recursive (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, D_FMT))) { if (*decided == loc) return NULL; } else { if (decided == not && strcmp (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, D_FMT), HERE_D_FMT)) *decided = loc; break; } *decided = raw; } #endif /* Fall through. */ case 'D': /* Match standard day format. */ if (!recursive (HERE_D_FMT)) return NULL; break; case 'H': /* Match hour in 24-hour clock. */ get_number (0, 23); tm->tm_hour = val; have_I = 0; break; case 'I': /* Match hour in 12-hour clock. */ get_number (1, 12); tm->tm_hour = val - 1; have_I = 1; break; case 'j': /* Match day number of year. */ get_number (1, 366); tm->tm_yday = val - 1; break; case 'm': /* Match number of month. */ get_number (1, 12); tm->tm_mon = val - 1; break; case 'M': /* Match minute. */ get_number (0, 59); tm->tm_min = val; break; case 'n': case 't': /* Match any white space. */ while (isspace (*rp)) ++rp; break; case 'p': /* Match locale's equivalent of AM/PM. */ #ifdef _NL_CURRENT if (*decided != raw) { if (match_string (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, AM_STR), rp)) { if (strcmp (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, AM_STR), HERE_AM_STR)) *decided = loc; break; } if (match_string (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, PM_STR), rp)) { if (strcmp (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, PM_STR), HERE_PM_STR)) *decided = loc; is_pm = 1; break; } *decided = raw; } #endif if (!match_string (HERE_AM_STR, rp)) if (match_string (HERE_PM_STR, rp)) is_pm = 1; else return NULL; break; case 'r': #ifdef _NL_CURRENT if (*decided != raw) { if (!recursive (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, T_FMT_AMPM))) { if (*decided == loc) return NULL; } else { if (*decided == not && strcmp (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, T_FMT_AMPM), HERE_T_FMT_AMPM)) *decided = loc; break; } *decided = raw; } #endif if (!recursive (HERE_T_FMT_AMPM)) return NULL; break; case 'R': if (!recursive ("%H:%M")) return NULL; break; case 's': { /* The number of seconds may be very high so we cannot use the `get_number' macro. Instead read the number character for character and construct the result while doing this. */ time_t secs; if (*rp < '0' || *rp > '9') /* We need at least one digit. */ return NULL; do { secs *= 10; secs += *rp++ - '0'; } while (*rp >= '0' && *rp <= '9'); if (localtime_r (&secs, tm) == NULL) /* Error in function. */ return NULL; } break; case 'S': get_number (0, 61); tm->tm_sec = val; break; case 'X': #ifdef _NL_CURRENT if (*decided != raw) { if (!recursive (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, T_FMT))) { if (*decided == loc) return NULL; } else { if (strcmp (_NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, T_FMT), HERE_T_FMT)) *decided = loc; break; } *decided = raw; } #endif /* Fall through. */ case 'T': if (!recursive (HERE_T_FMT)) return NULL; break; case 'u': get_number (1, 7); tm->tm_wday = val % 7; break; case 'g': get_number (0, 99); /* XXX This cannot determine any field in TM. */ break; case 'G': if (*rp < '0' || *rp > '9') return NULL; /* XXX Ignore the number since we would need some more information to compute a real date. */ do ++rp; while (*rp >= '0' && *rp <= '9'); break; case 'U': case 'V': case 'W': get_number (0, 53); /* XXX This cannot determine any field in TM without some information. */ break; case 'w': /* Match number of weekday. */ get_number (0, 6); tm->tm_wday = val; break; case 'y': /* Match year within century. */ get_number (0, 99); tm->tm_year = val; break; case 'Y': /* Match year including century number. */ get_number (0, INT_MAX); tm->tm_year = val - 1900; break; case 'Z': /* XXX How to handle this? */ break; case 'E': #ifdef _NL_CURRENT switch (*fmt++) { case 'c': /* Match locale's alternate date and time format. */ if (*decided != raw) { const char *fmt = _NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, ERA_D_T_FMT); if (*fmt == '\0') fmt = _NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, D_T_FMT); if (!recursive (fmt)) { if (*decided == loc) return NULL; } else { if (strcmp (fmt, HERE_D_T_FMT)) *decided = loc; break; } *decided = raw; } /* The C locale has no era information, so use the normal representation. */ if (!recursive (HERE_D_T_FMT)) return NULL; break; case 'C': case 'y': case 'Y': /* Match name of base year in locale's alternate representation. */ /* XXX This is currently not implemented. It should use the value _NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, ERA). */ break; case 'x': if (*decided != raw) { const char *fmt = _NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, ERA_D_FMT); if (*fmt == '\0') fmt = _NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, D_FMT); if (!recursive (fmt)) { if (*decided == loc) return NULL; } else { if (strcmp (fmt, HERE_D_FMT)) *decided = loc; break; } *decided = raw; } if (!recursive (HERE_D_FMT)) return NULL; break; case 'X': if (*decided != raw) { const char *fmt = _NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, ERA_T_FMT); if (*fmt == '\0') fmt = _NL_CURRENT (LC_TIME, T_FMT); if (!recursive (fmt)) { if (*decided == loc) return NULL; } else { if (strcmp (fmt, HERE_T_FMT)) *decided = loc; break; } *decided = raw; } if (!recursive (HERE_T_FMT)) return NULL; break; default: return NULL; } break; #else /* We have no information about the era format. Just use the normal format. */ if (*fmt != 'c' && *fmt != 'C' && *fmt != 'y' && *fmt != 'Y' && *fmt != 'x' && *fmt != 'X') /* This is an illegal format. */ return NULL; goto start_over; #endif case 'O': switch (*fmt++) { case 'd': case 'e': /* Match day of month using alternate numeric symbols. */ get_alt_number (1, 31); tm->tm_mday = val; break; case 'H': /* Match hour in 24-hour clock using alternate numeric symbols. */ get_alt_number (0, 23); tm->tm_hour = val; have_I = 0; break; case 'I': /* Match hour in 12-hour clock using alternate numeric symbols. */ get_alt_number (1, 12); tm->tm_hour = val - 1; have_I = 1; break; case 'm': /* Match month using alternate numeric symbols. */ get_alt_number (1, 12); tm->tm_mon = val - 1; break; case 'M': /* Match minutes using alternate numeric symbols. */ get_alt_number (0, 59); tm->tm_min = val; break; case 'S': /* Match seconds using alternate numeric symbols. */ get_alt_number (0, 61); tm->tm_sec = val; break; case 'U': case 'V': case 'W': get_alt_number (0, 53); /* XXX This cannot determine any field in TM without further information. */ break; case 'w': /* Match number of weekday using alternate numeric symbols. */ get_alt_number (0, 6); tm->tm_wday = val; break; case 'y': /* Match year within century using alternate numeric symbols. */ get_alt_number (0, 99); break; default: return NULL; } break; default: return NULL; } } if (have_I && is_pm) tm->tm_hour += 12; return (char *) rp; } char * strptime (buf, format, tm) const char *buf; const char *format; struct tm *tm; { enum locale_status decided; #ifdef _NL_CURRENT decided = not; #else decided = raw; #endif return strptime_internal (buf, format, tm, &decided); } cronolog-1.6.2/lib/getopt.c0000644000031100003110000007302006323133034011216 /* Getopt for GNU. NOTE: getopt is now part of the C library, so if you don't know what "Keep this file name-space clean" means, talk to roland@gnu.ai.mit.edu before changing it! Copyright (C) 1987, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is part of the GNU C Library. Its master source is NOT part of the C library, however. The master source lives in /gd/gnu/lib. The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ /* This tells Alpha OSF/1 not to define a getopt prototype in . Ditto for AIX 3.2 and . */ #ifndef _NO_PROTO #define _NO_PROTO #endif #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include #endif #if !defined (__STDC__) || !__STDC__ /* This is a separate conditional since some stdc systems reject `defined (const)'. */ #ifndef const #define const #endif #endif #include /* Comment out all this code if we are using the GNU C Library, and are not actually compiling the library itself. This code is part of the GNU C Library, but also included in many other GNU distributions. Compiling and linking in this code is a waste when using the GNU C library (especially if it is a shared library). Rather than having every GNU program understand `configure --with-gnu-libc' and omit the object files, it is simpler to just do this in the source for each such file. */ #define GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION 2 #if !defined (_LIBC) && defined (__GLIBC__) && __GLIBC__ >= 2 #include #if _GNU_GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION == GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION #define ELIDE_CODE #endif #endif #ifndef ELIDE_CODE /* This needs to come after some library #include to get __GNU_LIBRARY__ defined. */ #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ /* Don't include stdlib.h for non-GNU C libraries because some of them contain conflicting prototypes for getopt. */ #include #include #endif /* GNU C library. */ #ifdef VMS #include #if HAVE_STRING_H - 0 #include #endif #endif #if defined (WIN32) && !defined (__CYGWIN32__) /* It's not Unix, really. See? Capital letters. */ #include #define getpid() GetCurrentProcessId() #endif #ifndef _ /* This is for other GNU distributions with internationalized messages. When compiling libc, the _ macro is predefined. */ #ifdef HAVE_LIBINTL_H # include # define _(msgid) gettext (msgid) #else # define _(msgid) (msgid) #endif #endif /* This version of `getopt' appears to the caller like standard Unix `getopt' but it behaves differently for the user, since it allows the user to intersperse the options with the other arguments. As `getopt' works, it permutes the elements of ARGV so that, when it is done, all the options precede everything else. Thus all application programs are extended to handle flexible argument order. Setting the environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT disables permutation. Then the behavior is completely standard. GNU application programs can use a third alternative mode in which they can distinguish the relative order of options and other arguments. */ #include "getopt.h" /* For communication from `getopt' to the caller. When `getopt' finds an option that takes an argument, the argument value is returned here. Also, when `ordering' is RETURN_IN_ORDER, each non-option ARGV-element is returned here. */ char *optarg = NULL; /* Index in ARGV of the next element to be scanned. This is used for communication to and from the caller and for communication between successive calls to `getopt'. On entry to `getopt', zero means this is the first call; initialize. When `getopt' returns -1, this is the index of the first of the non-option elements that the caller should itself scan. Otherwise, `optind' communicates from one call to the next how much of ARGV has been scanned so far. */ /* 1003.2 says this must be 1 before any call. */ int optind = 1; /* Formerly, initialization of getopt depended on optind==0, which causes problems with re-calling getopt as programs generally don't know that. */ int __getopt_initialized = 0; /* The next char to be scanned in the option-element in which the last option character we returned was found. This allows us to pick up the scan where we left off. If this is zero, or a null string, it means resume the scan by advancing to the next ARGV-element. */ static char *nextchar; /* Callers store zero here to inhibit the error message for unrecognized options. */ int opterr = 1; /* Set to an option character which was unrecognized. This must be initialized on some systems to avoid linking in the system's own getopt implementation. */ int optopt = '?'; /* Describe how to deal with options that follow non-option ARGV-elements. If the caller did not specify anything, the default is REQUIRE_ORDER if the environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT is defined, PERMUTE otherwise. REQUIRE_ORDER means don't recognize them as options; stop option processing when the first non-option is seen. This is what Unix does. This mode of operation is selected by either setting the environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT, or using `+' as the first character of the list of option characters. PERMUTE is the default. We permute the contents of ARGV as we scan, so that eventually all the non-options are at the end. This allows options to be given in any order, even with programs that were not written to expect this. RETURN_IN_ORDER is an option available to programs that were written to expect options and other ARGV-elements in any order and that care about the ordering of the two. We describe each non-option ARGV-element as if it were the argument of an option with character code 1. Using `-' as the first character of the list of option characters selects this mode of operation. The special argument `--' forces an end of option-scanning regardless of the value of `ordering'. In the case of RETURN_IN_ORDER, only `--' can cause `getopt' to return -1 with `optind' != ARGC. */ static enum { REQUIRE_ORDER, PERMUTE, RETURN_IN_ORDER } ordering; /* Value of POSIXLY_CORRECT environment variable. */ static char *posixly_correct; #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ /* We want to avoid inclusion of string.h with non-GNU libraries because there are many ways it can cause trouble. On some systems, it contains special magic macros that don't work in GCC. */ #include #define my_index strchr #else /* Avoid depending on library functions or files whose names are inconsistent. */ char *getenv (); static char * my_index (str, chr) const char *str; int chr; { while (*str) { if (*str == chr) return (char *) str; str++; } return 0; } /* If using GCC, we can safely declare strlen this way. If not using GCC, it is ok not to declare it. */ #ifdef __GNUC__ /* Note that Motorola Delta 68k R3V7 comes with GCC but not stddef.h. That was relevant to code that was here before. */ #if !defined (__STDC__) || !__STDC__ /* gcc with -traditional declares the built-in strlen to return int, and has done so at least since version 2.4.5. -- rms. */ extern int strlen (const char *); #endif /* not __STDC__ */ #endif /* __GNUC__ */ #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ /* Handle permutation of arguments. */ /* Describe the part of ARGV that contains non-options that have been skipped. `first_nonopt' is the index in ARGV of the first of them; `last_nonopt' is the index after the last of them. */ static int first_nonopt; static int last_nonopt; #ifdef _LIBC /* Bash 2.0 gives us an environment variable containing flags indicating ARGV elements that should not be considered arguments. */ char *__getopt_nonoption_flags; static int nonoption_flags_max_len; static int nonoption_flags_len; static int original_argc; static char *const *original_argv; extern pid_t __libc_pid; /* Make sure the environment variable bash 2.0 puts in the environment is valid for the getopt call we must make sure that the ARGV passed to getopt is that one passed to the process. */ static void __attribute__ ((unused)) store_args_and_env (int argc, char *const *argv) { /* XXX This is no good solution. We should rather copy the args so that we can compare them later. But we must not use malloc(3). */ original_argc = argc; original_argv = argv; } text_set_element (__libc_subinit, store_args_and_env); # define SWAP_FLAGS(ch1, ch2) \ if (nonoption_flags_len > 0) \ { \ char __tmp = __getopt_nonoption_flags[ch1]; \ __getopt_nonoption_flags[ch1] = __getopt_nonoption_flags[ch2]; \ __getopt_nonoption_flags[ch2] = __tmp; \ } #else /* !_LIBC */ # define SWAP_FLAGS(ch1, ch2) #endif /* _LIBC */ /* Exchange two adjacent subsequences of ARGV. One subsequence is elements [first_nonopt,last_nonopt) which contains all the non-options that have been skipped so far. The other is elements [last_nonopt,optind), which contains all the options processed since those non-options were skipped. `first_nonopt' and `last_nonopt' are relocated so that they describe the new indices of the non-options in ARGV after they are moved. */ #if defined (__STDC__) && __STDC__ static void exchange (char **); #endif static void exchange (argv) char **argv; { int bottom = first_nonopt; int middle = last_nonopt; int top = optind; char *tem; /* Exchange the shorter segment with the far end of the longer segment. That puts the shorter segment into the right place. It leaves the longer segment in the right place overall, but it consists of two parts that need to be swapped next. */ #ifdef _LIBC /* First make sure the handling of the `__getopt_nonoption_flags' string can work normally. Our top argument must be in the range of the string. */ if (nonoption_flags_len > 0 && top >= nonoption_flags_max_len) { /* We must extend the array. The user plays games with us and presents new arguments. */ char *new_str = malloc (top + 1); if (new_str == NULL) nonoption_flags_len = nonoption_flags_max_len = 0; else { memcpy (new_str, __getopt_nonoption_flags, nonoption_flags_max_len); memset (&new_str[nonoption_flags_max_len], '\0', top + 1 - nonoption_flags_max_len); nonoption_flags_max_len = top + 1; __getopt_nonoption_flags = new_str; } } #endif while (top > middle && middle > bottom) { if (top - middle > middle - bottom) { /* Bottom segment is the short one. */ int len = middle - bottom; register int i; /* Swap it with the top part of the top segment. */ for (i = 0; i < len; i++) { tem = argv[bottom + i]; argv[bottom + i] = argv[top - (middle - bottom) + i]; argv[top - (middle - bottom) + i] = tem; SWAP_FLAGS (bottom + i, top - (middle - bottom) + i); } /* Exclude the moved bottom segment from further swapping. */ top -= len; } else { /* Top segment is the short one. */ int len = top - middle; register int i; /* Swap it with the bottom part of the bottom segment. */ for (i = 0; i < len; i++) { tem = argv[bottom + i]; argv[bottom + i] = argv[middle + i]; argv[middle + i] = tem; SWAP_FLAGS (bottom + i, middle + i); } /* Exclude the moved top segment from further swapping. */ bottom += len; } } /* Update records for the slots the non-options now occupy. */ first_nonopt += (optind - last_nonopt); last_nonopt = optind; } /* Initialize the internal data when the first call is made. */ #if defined (__STDC__) && __STDC__ static const char *_getopt_initialize (int, char *const *, const char *); #endif static const char * _getopt_initialize (argc, argv, optstring) int argc; char *const *argv; const char *optstring; { /* Start processing options with ARGV-element 1 (since ARGV-element 0 is the program name); the sequence of previously skipped non-option ARGV-elements is empty. */ first_nonopt = last_nonopt = optind = 1; nextchar = NULL; posixly_correct = getenv ("POSIXLY_CORRECT"); /* Determine how to handle the ordering of options and nonoptions. */ if (optstring[0] == '-') { ordering = RETURN_IN_ORDER; ++optstring; } else if (optstring[0] == '+') { ordering = REQUIRE_ORDER; ++optstring; } else if (posixly_correct != NULL) ordering = REQUIRE_ORDER; else ordering = PERMUTE; #ifdef _LIBC if (posixly_correct == NULL && argc == original_argc && argv == original_argv) { if (nonoption_flags_max_len == 0) { if (__getopt_nonoption_flags == NULL || __getopt_nonoption_flags[0] == '\0') nonoption_flags_max_len = -1; else { const char *orig_str = __getopt_nonoption_flags; int len = nonoption_flags_max_len = strlen (orig_str); if (nonoption_flags_max_len < argc) nonoption_flags_max_len = argc; __getopt_nonoption_flags = (char *) malloc (nonoption_flags_max_len); if (__getopt_nonoption_flags == NULL) nonoption_flags_max_len = -1; else { memcpy (__getopt_nonoption_flags, orig_str, len); memset (&__getopt_nonoption_flags[len], '\0', nonoption_flags_max_len - len); } } } nonoption_flags_len = nonoption_flags_max_len; } else nonoption_flags_len = 0; #endif return optstring; } /* Scan elements of ARGV (whose length is ARGC) for option characters given in OPTSTRING. If an element of ARGV starts with '-', and is not exactly "-" or "--", then it is an option element. The characters of this element (aside from the initial '-') are option characters. If `getopt' is called repeatedly, it returns successively each of the option characters from each of the option elements. If `getopt' finds another option character, it returns that character, updating `optind' and `nextchar' so that the next call to `getopt' can resume the scan with the following option character or ARGV-element. If there are no more option characters, `getopt' returns -1. Then `optind' is the index in ARGV of the first ARGV-element that is not an option. (The ARGV-elements have been permuted so that those that are not options now come last.) OPTSTRING is a string containing the legitimate option characters. If an option character is seen that is not listed in OPTSTRING, return '?' after printing an error message. If you set `opterr' to zero, the error message is suppressed but we still return '?'. If a char in OPTSTRING is followed by a colon, that means it wants an arg, so the following text in the same ARGV-element, or the text of the following ARGV-element, is returned in `optarg'. Two colons mean an option that wants an optional arg; if there is text in the current ARGV-element, it is returned in `optarg', otherwise `optarg' is set to zero. If OPTSTRING starts with `-' or `+', it requests different methods of handling the non-option ARGV-elements. See the comments about RETURN_IN_ORDER and REQUIRE_ORDER, above. Long-named options begin with `--' instead of `-'. Their names may be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is unique or is an exact match for some defined option. If they have an argument, it follows the option name in the same ARGV-element, separated from the option name by a `=', or else the in next ARGV-element. When `getopt' finds a long-named option, it returns 0 if that option's `flag' field is nonzero, the value of the option's `val' field if the `flag' field is zero. The elements of ARGV aren't really const, because we permute them. But we pretend they're const in the prototype to be compatible with other systems. LONGOPTS is a vector of `struct option' terminated by an element containing a name which is zero. LONGIND returns the index in LONGOPT of the long-named option found. It is only valid when a long-named option has been found by the most recent call. If LONG_ONLY is nonzero, '-' as well as '--' can introduce long-named options. */ int _getopt_internal (argc, argv, optstring, longopts, longind, long_only) int argc; char *const *argv; const char *optstring; const struct option *longopts; int *longind; int long_only; { optarg = NULL; if (!__getopt_initialized || optind == 0) { optstring = _getopt_initialize (argc, argv, optstring); optind = 1; /* Don't scan ARGV[0], the program name. */ __getopt_initialized = 1; } /* Test whether ARGV[optind] points to a non-option argument. Either it does not have option syntax, or there is an environment flag from the shell indicating it is not an option. The later information is only used when the used in the GNU libc. */ #ifdef _LIBC #define NONOPTION_P (argv[optind][0] != '-' || argv[optind][1] == '\0' \ || (optind < nonoption_flags_len \ && __getopt_nonoption_flags[optind] == '1')) #else #define NONOPTION_P (argv[optind][0] != '-' || argv[optind][1] == '\0') #endif if (nextchar == NULL || *nextchar == '\0') { /* Advance to the next ARGV-element. */ /* Give FIRST_NONOPT & LAST_NONOPT rational values if OPTIND has been moved back by the user (who may also have changed the arguments). */ if (last_nonopt > optind) last_nonopt = optind; if (first_nonopt > optind) first_nonopt = optind; if (ordering == PERMUTE) { /* If we have just processed some options following some non-options, exchange them so that the options come first. */ if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt && last_nonopt != optind) exchange ((char **) argv); else if (last_nonopt != optind) first_nonopt = optind; /* Skip any additional non-options and extend the range of non-options previously skipped. */ while (optind < argc && NONOPTION_P) optind++; last_nonopt = optind; } /* The special ARGV-element `--' means premature end of options. Skip it like a null option, then exchange with previous non-options as if it were an option, then skip everything else like a non-option. */ if (optind != argc && !strcmp (argv[optind], "--")) { optind++; if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt && last_nonopt != optind) exchange ((char **) argv); else if (first_nonopt == last_nonopt) first_nonopt = optind; last_nonopt = argc; optind = argc; } /* If we have done all the ARGV-elements, stop the scan and back over any non-options that we skipped and permuted. */ if (optind == argc) { /* Set the next-arg-index to point at the non-options that we previously skipped, so the caller will digest them. */ if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt) optind = first_nonopt; return -1; } /* If we have come to a non-option and did not permute it, either stop the scan or describe it to the caller and pass it by. */ if (NONOPTION_P) { if (ordering == REQUIRE_ORDER) return -1; optarg = argv[optind++]; return 1; } /* We have found another option-ARGV-element. Skip the initial punctuation. */ nextchar = (argv[optind] + 1 + (longopts != NULL && argv[optind][1] == '-')); } /* Decode the current option-ARGV-element. */ /* Check whether the ARGV-element is a long option. If long_only and the ARGV-element has the form "-f", where f is a valid short option, don't consider it an abbreviated form of a long option that starts with f. Otherwise there would be no way to give the -f short option. On the other hand, if there's a long option "fubar" and the ARGV-element is "-fu", do consider that an abbreviation of the long option, just like "--fu", and not "-f" with arg "u". This distinction seems to be the most useful approach. */ if (longopts != NULL && (argv[optind][1] == '-' || (long_only && (argv[optind][2] || !my_index (optstring, argv[optind][1]))))) { char *nameend; const struct option *p; const struct option *pfound = NULL; int exact = 0; int ambig = 0; int indfound = -1; int option_index; for (nameend = nextchar; *nameend && *nameend != '='; nameend++) /* Do nothing. */ ; /* Test all long options for either exact match or abbreviated matches. */ for (p = longopts, option_index = 0; p->name; p++, option_index++) if (!strncmp (p->name, nextchar, nameend - nextchar)) { if ((unsigned int) (nameend - nextchar) == (unsigned int) strlen (p->name)) { /* Exact match found. */ pfound = p; indfound = option_index; exact = 1; break; } else if (pfound == NULL) { /* First nonexact match found. */ pfound = p; indfound = option_index; } else /* Second or later nonexact match found. */ ambig = 1; } if (ambig && !exact) { if (opterr) fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option `%s' is ambiguous\n"), argv[0], argv[optind]); nextchar += strlen (nextchar); optind++; optopt = 0; return '?'; } if (pfound != NULL) { option_index = indfound; optind++; if (*nameend) { /* Don't test has_arg with >, because some C compilers don't allow it to be used on enums. */ if (pfound->has_arg) optarg = nameend + 1; else { if (opterr) if (argv[optind - 1][1] == '-') /* --option */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option `--%s' doesn't allow an argument\n"), argv[0], pfound->name); else /* +option or -option */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option `%c%s' doesn't allow an argument\n"), argv[0], argv[optind - 1][0], pfound->name); nextchar += strlen (nextchar); optopt = pfound->val; return '?'; } } else if (pfound->has_arg == 1) { if (optind < argc) optarg = argv[optind++]; else { if (opterr) fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option `%s' requires an argument\n"), argv[0], argv[optind - 1]); nextchar += strlen (nextchar); optopt = pfound->val; return optstring[0] == ':' ? ':' : '?'; } } nextchar += strlen (nextchar); if (longind != NULL) *longind = option_index; if (pfound->flag) { *(pfound->flag) = pfound->val; return 0; } return pfound->val; } /* Can't find it as a long option. If this is not getopt_long_only, or the option starts with '--' or is not a valid short option, then it's an error. Otherwise interpret it as a short option. */ if (!long_only || argv[optind][1] == '-' || my_index (optstring, *nextchar) == NULL) { if (opterr) { if (argv[optind][1] == '-') /* --option */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: unrecognized option `--%s'\n"), argv[0], nextchar); else /* +option or -option */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: unrecognized option `%c%s'\n"), argv[0], argv[optind][0], nextchar); } nextchar = (char *) ""; optind++; optopt = 0; return '?'; } } /* Look at and handle the next short option-character. */ { char c = *nextchar++; char *temp = my_index (optstring, c); /* Increment `optind' when we start to process its last character. */ if (*nextchar == '\0') ++optind; if (temp == NULL || c == ':') { if (opterr) { if (posixly_correct) /* 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: illegal option -- %c\n"), argv[0], c); else fprintf (stderr, _("%s: invalid option -- %c\n"), argv[0], c); } optopt = c; return '?'; } /* Convenience. Treat POSIX -W foo same as long option --foo */ if (temp[0] == 'W' && temp[1] == ';') { char *nameend; const struct option *p; const struct option *pfound = NULL; int exact = 0; int ambig = 0; int indfound = 0; int option_index; /* This is an option that requires an argument. */ if (*nextchar != '\0') { optarg = nextchar; /* If we end this ARGV-element by taking the rest as an arg, we must advance to the next element now. */ optind++; } else if (optind == argc) { if (opterr) { /* 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option requires an argument -- %c\n"), argv[0], c); } optopt = c; if (optstring[0] == ':') c = ':'; else c = '?'; return c; } else /* We already incremented `optind' once; increment it again when taking next ARGV-elt as argument. */ optarg = argv[optind++]; /* optarg is now the argument, see if it's in the table of longopts. */ for (nextchar = nameend = optarg; *nameend && *nameend != '='; nameend++) /* Do nothing. */ ; /* Test all long options for either exact match or abbreviated matches. */ for (p = longopts, option_index = 0; p->name; p++, option_index++) if (!strncmp (p->name, nextchar, nameend - nextchar)) { if ((unsigned int) (nameend - nextchar) == strlen (p->name)) { /* Exact match found. */ pfound = p; indfound = option_index; exact = 1; break; } else if (pfound == NULL) { /* First nonexact match found. */ pfound = p; indfound = option_index; } else /* Second or later nonexact match found. */ ambig = 1; } if (ambig && !exact) { if (opterr) fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option `-W %s' is ambiguous\n"), argv[0], argv[optind]); nextchar += strlen (nextchar); optind++; return '?'; } if (pfound != NULL) { option_index = indfound; if (*nameend) { /* Don't test has_arg with >, because some C compilers don't allow it to be used on enums. */ if (pfound->has_arg) optarg = nameend + 1; else { if (opterr) fprintf (stderr, _("\ %s: option `-W %s' doesn't allow an argument\n"), argv[0], pfound->name); nextchar += strlen (nextchar); return '?'; } } else if (pfound->has_arg == 1) { if (optind < argc) optarg = argv[optind++]; else { if (opterr) fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option `%s' requires an argument\n"), argv[0], argv[optind - 1]); nextchar += strlen (nextchar); return optstring[0] == ':' ? ':' : '?'; } } nextchar += strlen (nextchar); if (longind != NULL) *longind = option_index; if (pfound->flag) { *(pfound->flag) = pfound->val; return 0; } return pfound->val; } nextchar = NULL; return 'W'; /* Let the application handle it. */ } if (temp[1] == ':') { if (temp[2] == ':') { /* This is an option that accepts an argument optionally. */ if (*nextchar != '\0') { optarg = nextchar; optind++; } else optarg = NULL; nextchar = NULL; } else { /* This is an option that requires an argument. */ if (*nextchar != '\0') { optarg = nextchar; /* If we end this ARGV-element by taking the rest as an arg, we must advance to the next element now. */ optind++; } else if (optind == argc) { if (opterr) { /* 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option requires an argument -- %c\n"), argv[0], c); } optopt = c; if (optstring[0] == ':') c = ':'; else c = '?'; } else /* We already incremented `optind' once; increment it again when taking next ARGV-elt as argument. */ optarg = argv[optind++]; nextchar = NULL; } } return c; } } int getopt (argc, argv, optstring) int argc; char *const *argv; const char *optstring; { return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, optstring, (const struct option *) 0, (int *) 0, 0); } #endif /* Not ELIDE_CODE. */ #ifdef TEST /* Compile with -DTEST to make an executable for use in testing the above definition of `getopt'. */ int main (argc, argv) int argc; char **argv; { int c; int digit_optind = 0; while (1) { int this_option_optind = optind ? optind : 1; c = getopt (argc, argv, "abc:d:0123456789"); if (c == -1) break; switch (c) { case '0': case '1': case '2': case '3': case '4': case '5': case '6': case '7': case '8': case '9': if (digit_optind != 0 && digit_optind != this_option_optind) printf ("digits occur in two different argv-elements.\n"); digit_optind = this_option_optind; printf ("option %c\n", c); break; case 'a': printf ("option a\n"); break; case 'b': printf ("option b\n"); break; case 'c': printf ("option c with value `%s'\n", optarg); break; case '?': break; default: printf ("?? getopt returned character code 0%o ??\n", c); } } if (optind < argc) { printf ("non-option ARGV-elements: "); while (optind < argc) printf ("%s ", argv[optind++]); printf ("\n"); } exit (0); } #endif /* TEST */ cronolog-1.6.2/lib/getopt1.c0000644000031100003110000001105306323133077011304 /* getopt_long and getopt_long_only entry points for GNU getopt. Copyright (C) 1987,88,89,90,91,92,93,94,96,97 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is part of the GNU C Library. Its master source is NOT part of the C library, however. The master source lives in /gd/gnu/lib. The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include #endif #include "getopt.h" #if !defined (__STDC__) || !__STDC__ /* This is a separate conditional since some stdc systems reject `defined (const)'. */ #ifndef const #define const #endif #endif #include /* Comment out all this code if we are using the GNU C Library, and are not actually compiling the library itself. This code is part of the GNU C Library, but also included in many other GNU distributions. Compiling and linking in this code is a waste when using the GNU C library (especially if it is a shared library). Rather than having every GNU program understand `configure --with-gnu-libc' and omit the object files, it is simpler to just do this in the source for each such file. */ #define GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION 2 #if !defined (_LIBC) && defined (__GLIBC__) && __GLIBC__ >= 2 #include #if _GNU_GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION == GETOPT_INTERFACE_VERSION #define ELIDE_CODE #endif #endif #ifndef ELIDE_CODE /* This needs to come after some library #include to get __GNU_LIBRARY__ defined. */ #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ #include #endif #ifndef NULL #define NULL 0 #endif int getopt_long (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index) int argc; char *const *argv; const char *options; const struct option *long_options; int *opt_index; { return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index, 0); } /* Like getopt_long, but '-' as well as '--' can indicate a long option. If an option that starts with '-' (not '--') doesn't match a long option, but does match a short option, it is parsed as a short option instead. */ int getopt_long_only (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index) int argc; char *const *argv; const char *options; const struct option *long_options; int *opt_index; { return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index, 1); } #endif /* Not ELIDE_CODE. */ #ifdef TEST #include int main (argc, argv) int argc; char **argv; { int c; int digit_optind = 0; while (1) { int this_option_optind = optind ? optind : 1; int option_index = 0; static struct option long_options[] = { {"add", 1, 0, 0}, {"append", 0, 0, 0}, {"delete", 1, 0, 0}, {"verbose", 0, 0, 0}, {"create", 0, 0, 0}, {"file", 1, 0, 0}, {0, 0, 0, 0} }; c = getopt_long (argc, argv, "abc:d:0123456789", long_options, &option_index); if (c == -1) break; switch (c) { case 0: printf ("option %s", long_options[option_index].name); if (optarg) printf (" with arg %s", optarg); printf ("\n"); break; case '0': case '1': case '2': case '3': case '4': case '5': case '6': case '7': case '8': case '9': if (digit_optind != 0 && digit_optind != this_option_optind) printf ("digits occur in two different argv-elements.\n"); digit_optind = this_option_optind; printf ("option %c\n", c); break; case 'a': printf ("option a\n"); break; case 'b': printf ("option b\n"); break; case 'c': printf ("option c with value `%s'\n", optarg); break; case 'd': printf ("option d with value `%s'\n", optarg); break; case '?': break; default: printf ("?? getopt returned character code 0%o ??\n", c); } } if (optind < argc) { printf ("non-option ARGV-elements: "); while (optind < argc) printf ("%s ", argv[optind++]); printf ("\n"); } exit (0); } #endif /* TEST */ cronolog-1.6.2/lib/getopt.h0000644000031100003110000001112306323133052011217 /* Declarations for getopt. Copyright (C) 1989,90,91,92,93,94,96,97 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is part of the GNU C Library. Its master source is NOT part of the C library, however. The master source lives in /gd/gnu/lib. The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifndef _GETOPT_H #define _GETOPT_H 1 #ifdef __cplusplus extern "C" { #endif /* For communication from `getopt' to the caller. When `getopt' finds an option that takes an argument, the argument value is returned here. Also, when `ordering' is RETURN_IN_ORDER, each non-option ARGV-element is returned here. */ extern char *optarg; /* Index in ARGV of the next element to be scanned. This is used for communication to and from the caller and for communication between successive calls to `getopt'. On entry to `getopt', zero means this is the first call; initialize. When `getopt' returns -1, this is the index of the first of the non-option elements that the caller should itself scan. Otherwise, `optind' communicates from one call to the next how much of ARGV has been scanned so far. */ extern int optind; /* Callers store zero here to inhibit the error message `getopt' prints for unrecognized options. */ extern int opterr; /* Set to an option character which was unrecognized. */ extern int optopt; /* Describe the long-named options requested by the application. The LONG_OPTIONS argument to getopt_long or getopt_long_only is a vector of `struct option' terminated by an element containing a name which is zero. The field `has_arg' is: no_argument (or 0) if the option does not take an argument, required_argument (or 1) if the option requires an argument, optional_argument (or 2) if the option takes an optional argument. If the field `flag' is not NULL, it points to a variable that is set to the value given in the field `val' when the option is found, but left unchanged if the option is not found. To have a long-named option do something other than set an `int' to a compiled-in constant, such as set a value from `optarg', set the option's `flag' field to zero and its `val' field to a nonzero value (the equivalent single-letter option character, if there is one). For long options that have a zero `flag' field, `getopt' returns the contents of the `val' field. */ struct option { #if defined (__STDC__) && __STDC__ const char *name; #else char *name; #endif /* has_arg can't be an enum because some compilers complain about type mismatches in all the code that assumes it is an int. */ int has_arg; int *flag; int val; }; /* Names for the values of the `has_arg' field of `struct option'. */ #define no_argument 0 #define required_argument 1 #define optional_argument 2 #if defined (__STDC__) && __STDC__ #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ /* Many other libraries have conflicting prototypes for getopt, with differences in the consts, in stdlib.h. To avoid compilation errors, only prototype getopt for the GNU C library. */ extern int getopt (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts); #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ extern int getopt (); #endif /* __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ extern int getopt_long (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts, const struct option *longopts, int *longind); extern int getopt_long_only (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts, const struct option *longopts, int *longind); /* Internal only. Users should not call this directly. */ extern int _getopt_internal (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts, const struct option *longopts, int *longind, int long_only); #else /* not __STDC__ */ extern int getopt (); extern int getopt_long (); extern int getopt_long_only (); extern int _getopt_internal (); #endif /* __STDC__ */ #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif #endif /* _GETOPT_H */ cronolog-1.6.2/src/0000777000031100003110000000000007274470013007662 5cronolog-1.6.2/src/Makefile.in0000664000031100003110000002252707274470013011655 # Makefile.in generated automatically by automake 1.4 from Makefile.am # Copyright (C) 1994, 1995-8, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without # even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A # PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SHELL = @SHELL@ srcdir = @srcdir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ prefix = @prefix@ exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ bindir = @bindir@ sbindir = @sbindir@ libexecdir = @libexecdir@ datadir = @datadir@ sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ localstatedir = @localstatedir@ libdir = @libdir@ infodir = @infodir@ mandir = @mandir@ includedir = @includedir@ oldincludedir = /usr/include DESTDIR = pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ top_builddir = .. ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ INSTALL = @INSTALL@ INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ $(AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS) INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ transform = @program_transform_name@ NORMAL_INSTALL = : PRE_INSTALL = : POST_INSTALL = : NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : PRE_UNINSTALL = : POST_UNINSTALL = : CC = @CC@ LN_S = @LN_S@ MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ PERL = @PERL@ RANLIB = @RANLIB@ VERSION = @VERSION@ sbin_PROGRAMS = cronolog sbin_SCRIPTS = cronosplit noinst_PROGRAMS = cronotest cronolog_SOURCES = cronolog.c cronoutils.c cronoutils.h config.h cronotest_SOURCES = cronotest.c cronoutils.c cronoutils.h config.h INCLUDES = -I../lib LDADD = ../lib/libutil.a EXTRA_DIST = $(sbin_SCRIPTS) mkinstalldirs = $(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = cronosplit PROGRAMS = $(noinst_PROGRAMS) $(sbin_PROGRAMS) DEFS = @DEFS@ -I. -I$(srcdir) CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ LIBS = @LIBS@ cronotest_OBJECTS = cronotest.o cronoutils.o cronotest_LDADD = $(LDADD) cronotest_DEPENDENCIES = ../lib/libutil.a cronotest_LDFLAGS = cronolog_OBJECTS = cronolog.o cronoutils.o cronolog_LDADD = $(LDADD) cronolog_DEPENDENCIES = ../lib/libutil.a cronolog_LDFLAGS = SCRIPTS = $(sbin_SCRIPTS) CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ COMPILE = $(CC) $(DEFS) $(INCLUDES) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) $(CPPFLAGS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) CCLD = $(CC) LINK = $(CCLD) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) -o $@ DIST_COMMON = Makefile.am Makefile.in cronosplit.in DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) TAR = gtar GZIP_ENV = --best SOURCES = $(cronotest_SOURCES) $(cronolog_SOURCES) OBJECTS = $(cronotest_OBJECTS) $(cronolog_OBJECTS) all: all-redirect .SUFFIXES: .SUFFIXES: .S .c .o .s $(srcdir)/Makefile.in: Makefile.am $(top_srcdir)/configure.in $(ACLOCAL_M4) cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu --include-deps src/Makefile Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status cd $(top_builddir) \ && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status cronosplit: $(top_builddir)/config.status cronosplit.in cd $(top_builddir) && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status mostlyclean-noinstPROGRAMS: clean-noinstPROGRAMS: -test -z "$(noinst_PROGRAMS)" || rm -f $(noinst_PROGRAMS) distclean-noinstPROGRAMS: maintainer-clean-noinstPROGRAMS: mostlyclean-sbinPROGRAMS: clean-sbinPROGRAMS: -test -z "$(sbin_PROGRAMS)" || rm -f $(sbin_PROGRAMS) distclean-sbinPROGRAMS: maintainer-clean-sbinPROGRAMS: install-sbinPROGRAMS: $(sbin_PROGRAMS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir) @list='$(sbin_PROGRAMS)'; for p in $$list; do \ if test -f $$p; then \ echo " $(INSTALL_PROGRAM) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/`echo $$p|sed 's/$(EXEEXT)$$//'|sed '$(transform)'|sed 's/$$/$(EXEEXT)/'`"; \ $(INSTALL_PROGRAM) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/`echo $$p|sed 's/$(EXEEXT)$$//'|sed '$(transform)'|sed 's/$$/$(EXEEXT)/'`; \ else :; fi; \ done uninstall-sbinPROGRAMS: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) list='$(sbin_PROGRAMS)'; for p in $$list; do \ rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/`echo $$p|sed 's/$(EXEEXT)$$//'|sed '$(transform)'|sed 's/$$/$(EXEEXT)/'`; \ done .c.o: $(COMPILE) -c $< .s.o: $(COMPILE) -c $< .S.o: $(COMPILE) -c $< mostlyclean-compile: -rm -f *.o core *.core clean-compile: distclean-compile: -rm -f *.tab.c maintainer-clean-compile: cronotest: $(cronotest_OBJECTS) $(cronotest_DEPENDENCIES) @rm -f cronotest $(LINK) $(cronotest_LDFLAGS) $(cronotest_OBJECTS) $(cronotest_LDADD) $(LIBS) cronolog: $(cronolog_OBJECTS) $(cronolog_DEPENDENCIES) @rm -f cronolog $(LINK) $(cronolog_LDFLAGS) $(cronolog_OBJECTS) $(cronolog_LDADD) $(LIBS) install-sbinSCRIPTS: $(sbin_SCRIPTS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir) @list='$(sbin_SCRIPTS)'; for p in $$list; do \ if test -f $$p; then \ echo " $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`"; \ $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`; \ else if test -f $(srcdir)/$$p; then \ echo " $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $(srcdir)/$$p $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`"; \ $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $(srcdir)/$$p $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`; \ else :; fi; fi; \ done uninstall-sbinSCRIPTS: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) list='$(sbin_SCRIPTS)'; for p in $$list; do \ rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`; \ done tags: TAGS ID: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(LISP) list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do echo $$i; done | \ awk ' { files[$$0] = 1; } \ END { for (i in files) print i; }'`; \ here=`pwd` && cd $(srcdir) \ && mkid -f$$here/ID $$unique $(LISP) TAGS: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) $(LISP) tags=; \ here=`pwd`; \ list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do echo $$i; done | \ awk ' { files[$$0] = 1; } \ END { for (i in files) print i; }'`; \ test -z "$(ETAGS_ARGS)$$unique$(LISP)$$tags" \ || (cd $(srcdir) && etags $(ETAGS_ARGS) $$tags $$unique $(LISP) -o $$here/TAGS) mostlyclean-tags: clean-tags: distclean-tags: -rm -f TAGS ID maintainer-clean-tags: distdir = $(top_builddir)/$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir) subdir = src distdir: $(DISTFILES) @for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ d=$(srcdir); \ if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ cp -pr $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file; \ else \ test -f $(distdir)/$$file \ || ln $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file 2> /dev/null \ || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file || :; \ fi; \ done cronolog.o: cronolog.c cronoutils.h ../lib/getopt.h config.h cronotest.o: cronotest.c cronoutils.h ../lib/getopt.h config.h cronoutils.o: cronoutils.c cronoutils.h ../lib/getopt.h config.h info-am: info: info-am dvi-am: dvi: dvi-am check-am: all-am check: check-am installcheck-am: installcheck: installcheck-am install-exec-am: install-sbinPROGRAMS install-sbinSCRIPTS install-exec: install-exec-am install-data-am: install-data: install-data-am install-am: all-am @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am install: install-am uninstall-am: uninstall-sbinPROGRAMS uninstall-sbinSCRIPTS uninstall: uninstall-am all-am: Makefile $(PROGRAMS) $(SCRIPTS) all-redirect: all-am install-strip: $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS=-s install installdirs: $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir) mostlyclean-generic: clean-generic: distclean-generic: -rm -f Makefile $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) -rm -f config.cache config.log stamp-h stamp-h[0-9]* maintainer-clean-generic: mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-noinstPROGRAMS mostlyclean-sbinPROGRAMS \ mostlyclean-compile mostlyclean-tags \ mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am clean-am: clean-noinstPROGRAMS clean-sbinPROGRAMS clean-compile \ clean-tags clean-generic mostlyclean-am clean: clean-am distclean-am: distclean-noinstPROGRAMS distclean-sbinPROGRAMS \ distclean-compile distclean-tags distclean-generic \ clean-am distclean: distclean-am maintainer-clean-am: maintainer-clean-noinstPROGRAMS \ maintainer-clean-sbinPROGRAMS maintainer-clean-compile \ maintainer-clean-tags maintainer-clean-generic \ distclean-am @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am .PHONY: mostlyclean-noinstPROGRAMS distclean-noinstPROGRAMS \ clean-noinstPROGRAMS maintainer-clean-noinstPROGRAMS \ mostlyclean-sbinPROGRAMS distclean-sbinPROGRAMS clean-sbinPROGRAMS \ maintainer-clean-sbinPROGRAMS uninstall-sbinPROGRAMS \ install-sbinPROGRAMS mostlyclean-compile distclean-compile \ clean-compile maintainer-clean-compile uninstall-sbinSCRIPTS \ install-sbinSCRIPTS tags mostlyclean-tags distclean-tags clean-tags \ maintainer-clean-tags distdir info-am info dvi-am dvi check check-am \ installcheck-am installcheck install-exec-am install-exec \ install-data-am install-data install-am install uninstall-am uninstall \ all-redirect all-am all installdirs mostlyclean-generic \ distclean-generic clean-generic maintainer-clean-generic clean \ mostlyclean distclean maintainer-clean #mod_cronolog.c $(PROGRAMS): $(LDADD) # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: cronolog-1.6.2/src/Makefile.am0000644000031100003110000000065306500475364011643 ## Process this file with automake to create Makefile.in sbin_PROGRAMS = cronolog sbin_SCRIPTS = cronosplit noinst_PROGRAMS = cronotest cronolog_SOURCES = cronolog.c cronoutils.c cronoutils.h config.h cronotest_SOURCES = cronotest.c cronoutils.c cronoutils.h config.h INCLUDES = -I../lib LDADD = ../lib/libutil.a EXTRA_DIST = $(sbin_SCRIPTS) #mod_cronolog.c $(PROGRAMS): $(LDADD) cronolog-1.6.2/src/cronosplit.in0000755000031100003110000002270607031705524012333 #!@PERL@ -- # -*- perl -*- # ==================================================================== # Copyright (c) 1995-1999 The Apache Group. All rights reserved. # # Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without # modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions # are met: # # 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright # notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. # # 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright # notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in # the documentation and/or other materials provided with the # distribution. # # 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this # software must display the following acknowledgment: # "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group # for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." # # 4. The names "Apache Server" and "Apache Group" must not be used to # endorse or promote products derived from this software without # prior written permission. For written permission, please contact # apache@apache.org. # # 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache" # nor may "Apache" appear in their names without prior written # permission of the Apache Group. # # 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following # acknowledgment: # "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group # for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." # # THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP ``AS IS'' AND ANY # EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE # IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR # PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE GROUP OR # ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, # SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT # NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; # LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) # HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, # STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) # ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED # OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. # ==================================================================== # # This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many # individuals on behalf of the Apache Group and was originally based # on public domain software written at the National Center for # Supercomputing Applications, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign. # For more information on the Apache Group and the Apache HTTP server # project, please see . # # # cronosplit -- split log files into cronolog-compatible logs # # Copyright (c) 1996-1999 by Ford & Mason Ltd # # This software was submitted by Ford & Mason Ltd to the Apache # Software Foundation in December 1999. Future revisions and # derivatives of this source code must acknowledge Ford & Mason Ltd # as the original contributor of this module. All other licensing # and usage conditions are those of the Apache Software Foundation. # # cronosplit is loosly based on the splitlog script by # Roy Fielding # (splitlog is part of the wwwstat package, # see ) use Getopt::Long; $program = 'cronosplit'; $version = '@VERSION@'; # Parameters $MaxHandles = 50; $DirMode = 0775; # Patterns for log file entries (Common Log Format) and timestamps $log_entry_pattern = "^(\\S+) (\\S+) ([^[]+) \\[([^]]*)] \"([^\"]*)\" (\\S+) (\\S+)(.*)"; $timestamp_pattern = "^([ 0-3]?\\d)/([A-Za-z]+)/(\\d{4}):(\\d\\d):(\\d\\d):(\\d\\d) [+ -]\\d{1,4}"; # An associative array of month names and abbreviations %month = (Jan => 1, January => 1, Feb => 2, February => 2, Mar => 3, March => 3, Apr => 4, April => 4, May => 5, Jun => 6, June => 6, Jul => 7, July => 7, Aug => 8, August => 8, Sep => 9, September => 9, Sept => 9, Oct => 10, October => 10, Nov => 11, November => 11, Dec => 12, December => 12); @month = ("", "January", "February", "March", "April", "May", "June", "July", "August", "September", "October", "November", "December"); @mmm = ("", "Jan", "Feb", "Mar", "Apr", "May", "Jun", "Jul", "Aug", "Sep", "Oct", "Nov", "Dec"); @days = ("Sunday", "Monday", "Tuesday", "Wednesday", "Thursday", "Friday", "Saturday"); @ddd = ("Sun", "Mon", "Tue", "Wed", "Thu", "Fri", "Sat"); # Process options (GetOptions("template=s", \$template, "print-invalid", \$PrintInvalids, "debug", \$debug, "verbose", \$verbose, "help", \$print_help, "version", \$print_version) and ($print_help or $print_version or $template)) or $print_help++; $verbose++ if $debug; # --debug implies --verbose # If version number requested, print it and exit if ($print_version) { print < $program is part of the cronolog package. The latest version of which can be found at: http://www.ford-mason.co.uk/resources/cronolog/ EOF exit(0); } # If help requested, print it and exit if ($print_help) { print <) { my($host, $ident, $authuser, $timestamp, $request, $status, $bytes, $trailer) = /$log_entry_pattern/; if (!($host && $ident && $authuser && $timestamp && $request && $status)) { if ($PrintInvalids) { print STDERR "$.:$saveline"; } next LINE; } if ($timestamp =~ /$timestamp_pattern/) { ($day, $mon, $year, $hour, $min, $sec) = ($1, $2, $3, $4, $5, $6); } else { if ($PrintInvalids) { print STDERR "$.:$saveline"; } next LINE; } next LINE unless defined($outfile = &get_handle($template, $day, $mon, $year, $hour, $min, $sec)); print($outfile $host, ' ', $ident, ' ', $authuser, ' [', $timestamp, '] "', $request, '" ', $status, ' ', $bytes, $trailer, "\n"); } close(INFILE); } # Get a file handle for a log file, closing the oldest handle if there # are too many handles open sub get_handle { my($template, $day, $mon, $year, $hour, $min, $sec) = @_; $mon = $month{$mon}; # Determine the filename from the template and time my($file) = $template; $file =~ s/%Y/sprintf("%04d", $year)/eg; $file =~ s/%m/sprintf("%02d", $mon)/eg; $file =~ s/%d/sprintf("%02d", $day)/eg; $file =~ s/%b/$mmm[$mon]/g; $file =~ s/%B/$month[$mon]/g; $file =~ s/%H/sprintf("%02d", $hour)/eg; $file =~ s/%M/sprintf("%02m", $min)/eg; $file =~ s/%S/sprintf("%02m", $sec)/eg; # See if we already have it open and ready to write return $handle if defined($handle = $OpenHandles{$file}); # See if we already have too many files opened if (($#HandlesInUse + 1) >= $MaxHandles) { local($oldkey) = shift @HandlesInUse; # close the oldest $handle = $OpenHandles{$oldkey}; delete $OpenHandles{$oldkey}; close $handle; } # Finally, try to open and remember a new handle for this pathkey $handle = ++$NextHandle; make_dirs($file); if (open($handle, ">>$file")) { push(@HandlesInUse, $file); $OpenHandles{$file} = $handle; return $handle; } else { warn "Failed open of $file: $!\n"; return undef; } } # Make any missing directories on the path specified # (this subroutine is not optimal). sub make_dirs { my($path) = shift; my($abs); # Strip off the filename bit $path =~ s!/[^/]*$!! or return; # Return early if the directory exists return if -d $path; # Trim off any leading '/' (remembering whether the path was # absolute or relative) $path =~ s!^(/)!!; $abs = $1; # Split what's left into directories my(@path) = split(/\//, $path); # Check each directory on the path foreach $i (0 .. $#path) { $path = $abs . join("/", (@path[0 .. $i])); print(STDERR "Testing $path\n") if $debug; print(STDERR "Making $path\n") if !-d $path and $debug; mkdir($path, $DirMode) unless -d $path; } } cronolog-1.6.2/src/cronotest.c0000644000031100003110000002045507274303304011766 /* ==================================================================== * Copyright (c) 1995-1999 The Apache Group. All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this * software must display the following acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group * for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." * * 4. The names "Apache Server" and "Apache Group" must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software without * prior written permission. For written permission, please contact * apache@apache.org. * * 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache" * nor may "Apache" appear in their names without prior written * permission of the Apache Group. * * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following * acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group * for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP ``AS IS'' AND ANY * EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE GROUP OR * ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * ==================================================================== * * This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many * individuals on behalf of the Apache Group and was originally based * on public domain software written at the National Center for * Supercomputing Applications, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign. * For more information on the Apache Group and the Apache HTTP server * project, please see . * */ /* * cronotest -- test harness for cronoutils * * Copyright (c) 1996-1999 by Ford & Mason Ltd * * This software was submitted by Ford & Mason Ltd to the Apache * Software Foundation in December 1999. Future revisions and * derivatives of this source code must acknowledge Ford & Mason Ltd * as the original contributor of this module. All other licensing * and usage conditions are those of the Apache Software Foundation. * * Originally written by Andrew Ford * * Usage: * * cronotest [OPTIONS] template count */ #include "cronoutils.h" #include "getopt.h" #define VERSION_MSG "%s: test program for " PACKAGE " version " VERSION "\n" #define USAGE_MSG "usage: %s [OPTIONS] template count\n" \ "\n"\ " -a, --american American date formats\n" \ " -e, --european European date formats (default)\n" \ " -p PERIOD, --period=PERIOD set the rotation period explicitly\n" \ " -d DELAY, --delay=DELAY set the rotation period delay\n" \ " -s, --start-time=TIME starting time\n" \ " -z TZ, --time-zone=TZ use TZ for timezone\n" \ " -h, --help print this help, then exit\n" \ " -v, --verbose print verbose messages\n" \ " -V, --version print version number, then exit\n" \ "\n" \ "Starting time can be expressed in one of the following formats:\n" \ "\n" \ " dd month year [HH:MM[:SS]]\n" \ " dd mm year [HH:MM[:SS]]\n" \ "\n" \ "If American date formats are selected then the day and month \n" \ "specifiers are transposed.\n" \ "\n" char *short_options = "ad:ep:s:z:hVvD"; struct option long_options[] = { { "american", no_argument, NULL, 'a' }, { "european", no_argument, NULL, 'e' }, { "start-time", required_argument, NULL, 's' }, { "time-zone", required_argument, NULL, 'z' }, { "period", required_argument, NULL, 'p' }, { "delay", required_argument, NULL, 'd' }, { "test-subdirs", required_argument, NULL, 'D' }, { "help", no_argument, NULL, 'h' }, { "version", no_argument, NULL, 'V' }, { "verbose", no_argument, NULL, 'v' } }; /* Test harness for determine_periodicity and start_of_this/next_period */ int main(int argc, char **argv, char **envp) { PERIODICITY periodicity = UNKNOWN; PERIODICITY period_delay_units = UNKNOWN; int period_multiple = 1; int period_delay = 0; int use_american_date_formats = 0; time_t time_now = time(NULL); struct tm *tm; char *start_time = NULL; char *template; int ch; int n; int i; char buf[BUFSIZE]; char filename[MAX_PATH]; int test_subdir_creation = 0; debug_file = stdout; while ((ch = getopt_long(argc, argv, short_options, long_options, NULL)) != EOF) { switch (ch) { case 'a': use_american_date_formats = 1; break; case 'e': use_american_date_formats = 0; break; case 'd': period_delay_units = parse_timespec(optarg, &period_delay); break; case 'p': periodicity = parse_timespec(optarg, &period_multiple); if ( (periodicity == INVALID_PERIOD) || (periodicity == PER_SECOND) && (60 % period_multiple) || (periodicity == PER_MINUTE) && (60 % period_multiple) || (periodicity == HOURLY) && (24 % period_multiple) || (periodicity == DAILY) && (period_multiple > 365) || (periodicity == WEEKLY) && (period_multiple > 52) || (periodicity == MONTHLY) && (12 % period_multiple)) { fprintf(stderr, "%s: invalid explicit period specification (%s)\n", argv[0], start_time); exit(1); } break; case 's': start_time = optarg; break; case 'z': sprintf(buf, "TZ=%s", optarg); putenv(buf); break; case 'V': fprintf(stderr, VERSION_MSG, argv[0]); exit(0); case 'D': test_subdir_creation++; break; case 'v': debug_file = stdout; break; case 'h': case '?': fprintf(stderr, USAGE_MSG, argv[0]); exit(1); } } if (optind != argc - 2) { fprintf(stderr, USAGE_MSG, argv[0]); exit(1); } if (start_time) { time_now = parse_time(start_time, use_american_date_formats); if (time_now == -1) { fprintf(stderr, "%s: invalid start time (%s)\n", argv[0], start_time); exit(1); } } template = argv[optind++]; n = atoi(argv[optind]); if (periodicity == UNKNOWN) { periodicity = determine_periodicity(template); } if (period_delay) { if ( (period_delay_units > periodicity) || ( period_delay_units == periodicity && abs(period_delay) >= period_multiple)) { fprintf(stderr, "%s: period delay cannot be larger than the rollover period\n", argv[0], start_time); exit(1); } period_delay *= period_seconds[period_delay_units]; } printf("Rotation period is per %d %s\n", period_multiple, periods[periodicity]); tm = localtime(&time_now); strftime(buf, sizeof (buf), "%c %Z", tm); printf("Start time is %s (%ld)\n", buf, time_now); for (i = 1; i <= n; i++) { tm = localtime(&time_now); strftime(buf, sizeof (buf), "%c %Z", tm); printf("Period %d starts at %s (%ld): ", i, buf, time_now); time_now = start_of_this_period(time_now, periodicity, period_multiple); tm = localtime(&time_now); strftime(filename, MAX_PATH, template, tm); printf("\"%s\"\n", filename); if (test_subdir_creation) { create_subdirs(filename); } time_now = start_of_next_period(time_now, periodicity, period_multiple) + period_delay; } return 0; } cronolog-1.6.2/src/cronoutils.c0000644000031100003110000004470107274305251012152 /* ==================================================================== * Copyright (c) 1995-1999 The Apache Group. All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this * software must display the following acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group * for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." * * 4. The names "Apache Server" and "Apache Group" must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software without * prior written permission. For written permission, please contact * apache@apache.org. * * 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache" * nor may "Apache" appear in their names without prior written * permission of the Apache Group. * * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following * acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group * for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP ``AS IS'' AND ANY * EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE GROUP OR * ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * ==================================================================== * * This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many * individuals on behalf of the Apache Group and was originally based * on public domain software written at the National Center for * Supercomputing Applications, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign. * For more information on the Apache Group and the Apache HTTP server * project, please see . * */ /* * cronoutils -- utilities for the cronolog program * * Copyright (c) 1996-1999 by Ford & Mason Ltd * * This software was submitted by Ford & Mason Ltd to the Apache * Software Foundation in December 1999. Future revisions and * derivatives of this source code must acknowledge Ford & Mason Ltd * as the original contributor of this module. All other licensing * and usage conditions are those of the Apache Software Foundation. * * Originally written by Andrew Ford * */ #include "cronoutils.h" extern char *tzname[2]; #ifdef _WIN32 #include "strptime.h" #endif /* debug_file is the file to output debug messages to. No debug * messages are output if it is set to NULL. */ FILE *debug_file = NULL; /* America and Europe disagree on whether weeks start on Sunday or * Monday - weeks_start_on_mondays is set if a %U specifier is encountered. */ int weeks_start_on_mondays = 0; /* periods[] is an array of the names of the periods. */ char *periods[] = { "second", "minute", "hour", "day", "week", "month", "year", "aeon" /* i.e. once only */ }; /* period_seconds[] is an array of the number of seconds in a period. */ int period_seconds[] = { 1, 60, 60 * 60, 60 * 60 * 24, 60 * 60 * 24 * 7, 60 * 60 * 24 * 31, 60 * 60 * 24 * 36 }; /* Try to create missing directories on the path of filename. * * Note that on a busy server there may theoretically be many cronolog * processes trying simultaneously to create the same subdirectories * so ignore any EEXIST errors on mkdir -- they probably just mean * that another process got there first. * * Unless CHECK_ALL_PREFIX_DIRS is defined, we save the directory of * the last file tested -- any common prefix should exist. This * probably only saves a few stat system calls at the start of each * log period, but it might as well be done. */ void create_subdirs(char *filename) { #ifndef CHECK_ALL_PREFIX_DIRS static char lastpath[MAX_PATH] = ""; #endif struct stat stat_buf; char dirname[MAX_PATH]; char *p; DEBUG(("Creating missing components of \"%s\"\n", filename)); for (p = filename; (p = strchr(p, '/')); p++) { if (p == filename) { continue; /* Don't bother with the root directory */ } memcpy(dirname, filename, p - filename); dirname[p-filename] = '\0'; #ifndef CHECK_ALL_PREFIX_DIRS if (strncmp(dirname, lastpath, strlen(dirname)) == 0) { DEBUG(("Initial prefix \"%s\" known to exist\n", dirname)); continue; } #endif DEBUG(("Testing directory \"%s\"\n", dirname)); if (stat(dirname, &stat_buf) < 0) { if (errno != ENOENT) { perror(dirname); exit(2); } else { DEBUG(("Directory \"%s\" does not exist -- creating\n", dirname)); if ((mkdir(dirname, DIR_MODE) < 0) && (errno != EEXIST)) #ifndef _WIN32 { #else if ((mkdir(dirname) < 0) && (errno != EEXIST)) #endif perror(dirname); exit(2); } } } } #ifndef CHECK_ALL_PREFIX_DIRS strcpy(lastpath, dirname); #endif } /* Create a hard or symbolic link to a filename according to the type specified. * * This function could do with more error checking! */ void create_link(char *pfilename, const char *linkname, mode_t linktype, const char *prevlinkname) { struct stat stat_buf; if (stat(prevlinkname, &stat_buf) == 0) { unlink(prevlinkname); } if (stat(linkname, &stat_buf) == 0) { if (prevlinkname) { rename(linkname, prevlinkname); } else { unlink(linkname); } } #ifndef _WIN32 if (linktype == S_IFLNK) { symlink(pfilename, linkname); } else { link(pfilename, linkname); } #else fprintf(stderr, "Creating link from %s to %s not supported", pfilename, linkname); #endif } /* Examine the log file name specifier for strftime conversion * specifiers and determine the period between log files. * Smallest period allowed is per minute. */ PERIODICITY determine_periodicity(char *spec) { PERIODICITY periodicity = ONCE_ONLY; char ch; DEBUG(("Determining periodicity of \"%s\"\n", spec)); while ((ch = *spec++) != 0) { if (ch == '%') { ch = *spec++; if (!ch) break; switch (ch) { case 'y': /* two digit year */ case 'Y': /* four digit year */ if (periodicity > YEARLY) { DEBUG(("%%%c -> yearly\n", ch)); periodicity = YEARLY; } break; case 'b': /* abbreviated month name */ case 'h': /* abbreviated month name (non-standard) */ case 'B': /* full month name */ case 'm': /* month as two digit number (with leading zero) */ if (periodicity > MONTHLY) { DEBUG(("%%%c -> monthly\n", ch)); periodicity = MONTHLY; } break; case 'U': /* week number (weeks start on Sunday) */ case 'W': /* week number (weeks start on Monday) */ if (periodicity > WEEKLY) { DEBUG(("%%%c -> weeky\n", ch)); periodicity = WEEKLY; weeks_start_on_mondays = (ch == 'W'); } break; case 'a': /* abbreviated weekday name */ case 'A': /* full weekday name */ case 'd': /* day of the month (with leading zero) */ case 'e': /* day of the month (with leading space -- non-standard) */ case 'j': /* day of the year (with leading zeroes) */ case 'w': /* day of the week (0-6) */ case 'D': /* full date spec (non-standard) */ case 'x': /* full date spec */ if (periodicity > DAILY) { DEBUG(("%%%c -> daily\n", ch)); periodicity = DAILY; } break; case 'H': /* hour (24 hour clock) */ case 'I': /* hour (12 hour clock) */ case 'p': /* AM/PM indicator */ if (periodicity > HOURLY) { DEBUG(("%%%c -> hourly\n", ch)); periodicity = HOURLY; } break; case 'M': /* minute */ if (periodicity > PER_MINUTE) { DEBUG(("%%%c -> per minute\n", ch)); periodicity = PER_MINUTE; } break; case 'S': /* second */ case 's': /* seconds since the epoch (GNU non-standard) */ case 'c': /* full time and date spec */ case 'T': /* full time spec */ case 'r': /* full time spec (non-standard) */ case 'R': /* full time spec (non-standard) */ DEBUG(("%%%c -> per second", ch)); periodicity = PER_SECOND; default: /* ignore anything else */ DEBUG(("ignoring %%%c\n", ch)); break; } } } return periodicity; } /* */ PERIODICITY parse_timespec(char *optarg, int *p_period_multiple) { PERIODICITY periodicity = INVALID_PERIOD; int period_multiple = 1; char *p = optarg; /* Skip leading whitespace */ while (isspace(*p)) { p++; } /* Parse a digit string */ if (isdigit(*p)) { period_multiple = *p++ - '0'; while (isdigit(*p)) { period_multiple *= 10; period_multiple += (*p++ - '0'); } } /* Skip whitespace */ while (isspace(*p)) { p++; } if (strncasecmp(p, "sec", 3) == 0) { if (period_multiple < 60) { periodicity = PER_SECOND; } } else if (strncasecmp(p, "min", 3) == 0) { if (period_multiple < 60) { periodicity = PER_MINUTE; } } else if (strncasecmp(p, "hour", 4) == 0) { if (period_multiple < 24) { periodicity = HOURLY; } } else if (strncasecmp(p, "day", 3) == 0) { if (period_multiple <= 31) { periodicity = DAILY; } } else if (strncasecmp(p, "week", 4) == 0) { if (period_multiple < 53) { periodicity = WEEKLY; } } else if (strncasecmp(p, "mon", 3) == 0) { if (period_multiple <= 12) { periodicity = MONTHLY; } } *p_period_multiple = period_multiple; return periodicity; } /* To determine the time of the start of the next period add just * enough to move beyond the start of the next period and then * determine the time of the start of that period. * * There is a potential problem if the start or end of daylight saving * time occurs during the current period. */ time_t start_of_next_period(time_t time_now, PERIODICITY periodicity, int period_multiple) { time_t start_time; switch (periodicity) { case YEARLY: start_time = (time_now + 366 * SECS_PER_DAY + DST_ALLOWANCE); break; case MONTHLY: start_time = (time_now + 31 * SECS_PER_DAY + DST_ALLOWANCE); break; case WEEKLY: start_time = (time_now + SECS_PER_WEEK + DST_ALLOWANCE); break; case DAILY: start_time = (time_now + SECS_PER_DAY + DST_ALLOWANCE); break; case HOURLY: start_time = time_now + period_multiple * SECS_PER_HOUR + LEAP_SECOND_ALLOWANCE; break; case PER_MINUTE: start_time = time_now + period_multiple * SECS_PER_MIN + LEAP_SECOND_ALLOWANCE; break; case PER_SECOND: start_time = time_now + 1; break; default: start_time = FAR_DISTANT_FUTURE; break; } return start_of_this_period(start_time, periodicity, period_multiple); } /* Determine the time of the start of the period containing a given time. * Break down the time with localtime and subtract the number of * seconds since the start of the period. If the length of period is * equal or longer than a day then we have to check tht the * calculation is not thrown out by the start or end of daylight * saving time. */ time_t start_of_this_period(time_t start_time, PERIODICITY periodicity, int period_multiple) { struct tm tm_initial; struct tm tm_adjusted; int expected_mday; #ifndef _WIN32 localtime_r(&start_time, &tm_initial); #else struct tm * tempTime; tempTime = localtime(&start_time); if (NULL != tempTime) { memcpy(&tm_initial, tempTime, sizeof(struct tm)); free(tempTime); tempTime = NULL; } #endif switch (periodicity) { case YEARLY: case MONTHLY: case WEEKLY: case DAILY: switch (periodicity) { case YEARLY: start_time -= ( (tm_initial.tm_yday * SECS_PER_DAY) + (tm_initial.tm_hour * SECS_PER_HOUR) + (tm_initial.tm_min * SECS_PER_MIN) + (tm_initial.tm_sec)); expected_mday = 1; break; case MONTHLY: start_time -= ( ((tm_initial.tm_mday - 1) * SECS_PER_DAY) + ( tm_initial.tm_hour * SECS_PER_HOUR) + ( tm_initial.tm_min * SECS_PER_MIN) + ( tm_initial.tm_sec)); expected_mday = 1; break; case WEEKLY: if (weeks_start_on_mondays) { tm_initial.tm_wday = (6 + tm_initial.tm_wday) % 7; } start_time -= ( (tm_initial.tm_wday * SECS_PER_DAY) + (tm_initial.tm_hour * SECS_PER_HOUR) + (tm_initial.tm_min * SECS_PER_MIN) + (tm_initial.tm_sec)); expected_mday = tm_initial.tm_mday; break; case DAILY: start_time -= ( (tm_initial.tm_hour * SECS_PER_HOUR) + (tm_initial.tm_min * SECS_PER_MIN ) + tm_initial.tm_sec); expected_mday = tm_initial.tm_mday; break; default: fprintf(stderr, "software fault in start_of_this_period()\n"); exit(1); } /* If the time of day is not equal to midnight then we need to * adjust for daylight saving time. Adjust the time backwards * by the value of the hour, minute and second fields. If the * day of the month is not as expected one then we must have * adjusted back to the previous day so add 24 hours worth of * seconds. */ #ifndef _WIN32 localtime_r(&start_time, &tm_adjusted); #else tempTime = localtime(&start_time); if (NULL != tempTime) { memcpy(&tm_adjusted, tempTime, sizeof(struct tm)); free(tempTime); tempTime = NULL; } #endif if ( (tm_adjusted.tm_hour != 0) || (tm_adjusted.tm_min != 0) || (tm_adjusted.tm_sec != 0)) { char sign = '-'; time_t adjust = - ( (tm_adjusted.tm_hour * SECS_PER_HOUR) + (tm_adjusted.tm_min * SECS_PER_MIN) + (tm_adjusted.tm_sec)); if (tm_adjusted.tm_mday != expected_mday) { adjust += SECS_PER_DAY; sign = '+'; } start_time += adjust; if (adjust < 0) { adjust = -adjust; } DEBUG(("Adjust for dst: %02d/%02d/%04d %02d:%02d:%02d -- %c%0d:%02d:%02d\n", tm_initial.tm_mday, tm_initial.tm_mon+1, tm_initial.tm_year+1900, tm_initial.tm_hour, tm_initial.tm_min, tm_initial.tm_sec, sign, adjust / SECS_PER_HOUR, (adjust / 60) % 60, adjust % SECS_PER_HOUR)); } break; case HOURLY: start_time -= (tm_initial.tm_sec + tm_initial.tm_min * SECS_PER_MIN); if (period_multiple > 1) { start_time -= SECS_PER_HOUR * (tm_initial.tm_hour - period_multiple * (tm_initial.tm_hour / period_multiple)); } break; case PER_MINUTE: start_time -= tm_initial.tm_sec; if (period_multiple > 1) { start_time -= SECS_PER_MIN * (tm_initial.tm_min - period_multiple * (tm_initial.tm_min / period_multiple)); } break; case PER_SECOND: /* No adjustment needed */ default: break; } return start_time; } /* Converts struct tm to time_t, assuming the data in tm is UTC rather * than local timezone (as mktime assumes). * * Contributed by Roger Beeman . */ time_t mktime_from_utc(struct tm *t) { time_t tl, tb; tl = mktime(t); tb = mktime(gmtime(&tl)); return (tl <= tb ? (tl + (tl - tb)) : (tl - (tb - tl))); } /* Check whether the string is processed well. It is processed if the * pointer is non-NULL, and it is either at the `GMT', or at the end * of the string. */ static int check_end(const char *p) { if (!p) return 0; while (isspace(*p)) ++p; if (!*p || (p[0] == 'G' && p[1] == 'M' && p[2] == 'T')) return 1; else return 0; } /* NOTE: We don't use `%n' for white space, as OSF's strptime uses it to eat all white space up to (and including) a newline, and the function fails (!) if there is no newline. Let's hope all strptime-s use ` ' to skipp *all* whitespace instead of just one (it works that way on all the systems I've tested it on). */ static char *european_date_formats[] = { "%d %b %Y %T", /* dd mmm yyyy HH:MM:SS */ "%d %b %Y %H:%M", /* dd mmm yyyy HH:MM */ "%d %b %Y", /* dd mmm yyyy */ "%d-%b-%Y %T", /* dd-mmm-yyyy HH:MM:SS */ "%d-%b-%Y %H:%M", /* dd-mmm-yyyy HH:MM */ "%d-%b-%y %T", /* dd-mmm-yy HH:MM:SS */ "%d-%b-%y %H:%M", /* dd-mmm-yy HH:MM */ "%d-%b-%Y", "%b %d %T %Y", "%b %d %Y", NULL }; static char *american_date_formats[] = { "%b %d %Y %T", /* dd mmm yyyy HH:MM:SS */ "%b %d %Y %H:%M", /* dd mmm yyyy HH:MM */ "%b %d %Y", /* dd mmm yyyy */ "%b-%d-%Y %T", /* dd-mmm-yyyy HH:MM:SS */ "%b-%d-%Y %H:%M", /* dd-mmm-yyyy HH:MM */ "%b-%d-%Y", "%b/%d/%Y %T", "%b/%d/%Y %H:%M", "%b/%d/%Y", NULL }; time_t parse_time(char *time_str, int use_american_date_formats) { struct tm tm; char **date_formats; memset(&tm, 0, sizeof (tm)); tm.tm_isdst = -1; for (date_formats = (use_american_date_formats ? american_date_formats : european_date_formats); *date_formats; date_formats++) { if (check_end((const char *)strptime(time_str, *date_formats, &tm))) return mktime_from_utc(&tm); } return -1; } /* Simple debugging print function. */ void print_debug_msg(char *msg, ...) { va_list ap; va_start(ap, msg); vfprintf(debug_file, msg, ap); } /* Build a timestamp and return a pointer to it. * (has a number of static buffers that are rotated). */ char * timestamp(time_t thetime) { static int index = 0; static char buffer[4][80]; struct tm *tm; char *retval; retval = buffer[index++]; index %= 4; tm = localtime(&thetime); strftime(retval, 80, "%Y/%m/%d-%H:%M:%S %Z", tm); return retval; } cronolog-1.6.2/src/cronoutils.h0000644000031100003110000001353507274304754012167 /* ==================================================================== * Copyright (c) 1995-1999 The Apache Group. All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this * software must display the following acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group * for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." * * 4. The names "Apache Server" and "Apache Group" must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software without * prior written permission. For written permission, please contact * apache@apache.org. * * 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache" * nor may "Apache" appear in their names without prior written * permission of the Apache Group. * * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following * acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group * for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP ``AS IS'' AND ANY * EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE GROUP OR * ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * ==================================================================== * * This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many * individuals on behalf of the Apache Group and was originally based * on public domain software written at the National Center for * Supercomputing Applications, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign. * For more information on the Apache Group and the Apache HTTP server * project, please see . * */ /* * cronoutils -- utilities for the cronolog program * * Copyright (c) 1996-1999 by Ford & Mason Ltd * * This software was submitted by Ford & Mason Ltd to the Apache * Software Foundation in December 1999. Future revisions and * derivatives of this source code must acknowledge Ford & Mason Ltd * as the original contributor of this module. All other licensing * and usage conditions are those of the Apache Software Foundation. * * Originally written by Andrew Ford * * For platforms that don't declare getopt() in header files the symbol * NEED_GETOPT_DEFS can be defined and declarations are provided here. */ #if !defined(_CRONOUTILS_H_) /* Header files */ #include #include #include #include #include #include #include #ifndef _WIN32 #include #else #include #include #endif #include #include #include #if TIME_WITH_SYS_TIME # include # include #else # if HAVE_SYS_TIME_H # include # else # include # endif #endif #include "config.h" #ifdef _WIN32 #define mode_t int #define open _open #define close _close #define read _read #define write _write #define mkdir _mkdir #endif #if !HAVE_LOCALIME_R struct tm *localtime_r(const time_t *, struct tm *); #endif /* Some operating systems don't declare getopt() */ #ifdef NEED_GETOPT_DEFS int getopt(int argc, char * const argv[], const char *optstring); extern char *optarg; extern int optind, opterr, optopt; #endif /* Constants for seconds per minute, hour, day and week */ #define SECS_PER_MIN 60 #define SECS_PER_HOUR (60 * SECS_PER_MIN) #define SECS_PER_DAY (24 * SECS_PER_HOUR) #define SECS_PER_WEEK (7 * SECS_PER_DAY) /* Allowances for daylight saving time changes and leap second. * Used for calculating the start of the next period. * (does Unix actually know about leap seconds?) */ #define LEAP_SECOND_ALLOWANCE 2 #define DST_ALLOWANCE (3 * SECS_PER_HOUR + LEAP_SECOND_ALLOWANCE) /* If log files are not rotated then this is when the first file * should be closed. */ #define FAR_DISTANT_FUTURE LONG_MAX /* How often the log is rotated */ typedef enum { PER_SECOND, PER_MINUTE, HOURLY, DAILY, WEEKLY, MONTHLY, YEARLY, ONCE_ONLY, UNKNOWN, INVALID_PERIOD } PERIODICITY; /* Function prototypes */ void create_subdirs(char *); void create_link(char *, const char *, mode_t, const char *); PERIODICITY determine_periodicity(char *); PERIODICITY parse_timespec(char *optarg, int *p_period_multiple); time_t start_of_next_period(time_t, PERIODICITY, int); time_t start_of_this_period(time_t, PERIODICITY, int); void print_debug_msg(char *msg, ...); time_t parse_time(char *time_str, int); char *timestamp(time_t thetime); /* Global variables */ extern FILE *debug_file; extern char *periods[]; extern int period_seconds[]; /* Usage message and DEBUG macro. */ #ifdef DEBUG #undef DEBUG #endif #define DEBUG(msg_n_args) do { if (debug_file) print_debug_msg msg_n_args; } while (0) #endif cronolog-1.6.2/src/config.h0000644000031100003110000000314307234322050011206 /* * config.h -- configuration definitions for the cronolog program * $Id: config.h,v 1.1 1998/03/08 11:02:56 andrew Exp $ * * Copyright (C) 1996-1998 by Ford & Mason Ltd. * * Written by Andrew Ford * mailto:A.Ford@ford-mason.co.uk * http://www.ford-mason.co.uk/aford/ * * The file LICENSE specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution. * * The latest version of cronolog can be found at: * * http://www.ford-mason.co.uk/resources/cronolog/ * */ #ifndef _CONFIG_H_ #define _CONFIG_H_ /* Size of read buffer and filename buffer */ #ifndef BUFSIZE #define BUFSIZE 65536 #endif #ifndef MAX_PATH #define MAX_PATH 1024 #endif /* Default permissions for files and directories that are created */ #ifndef FILE_MODE #ifndef _WIN32 #define FILE_MODE ( S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IWGRP | S_IROTH ) #else #define FILE_MODE ( _S_IREAD | _S_IWRITE ) #endif #endif #ifndef DIR_MODE #define DIR_MODE ( S_IRWXU | S_IRWXG | S_IROTH | S_IXOTH ) #endif /* The program creates any new directories that may be needed, unless * DONT_CREATE_SUBDIRS is defined, in which case any directories * needed must exist or the program will abort. * * Uncomment the following definition if you want the alternative functionality: */ /* #define DONT_CREATE_SUBDIRS */ /* When creating new directories, common prefixes of the current log * file and the last file for which subdirectories were created are * not checked with stat(), unless CHECK_ALL_PREFIX_DIRS is defined. * * Uncomment the following definition if you want the alternative functionality: */ /* #define CHECK_ALL_PREFIX_DIRS */ #endif cronolog-1.6.2/src/cronolog.c0000644000031100003110000003143007274305210011561 /* ==================================================================== * Copyright (c) 1995-1999 The Apache Group. All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this * software must display the following acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group * for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." * * 4. The names "Apache Server" and "Apache Group" must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software without * prior written permission. For written permission, please contact * apache@apache.org. * * 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache" * nor may "Apache" appear in their names without prior written * permission of the Apache Group. * * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following * acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group * for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP ``AS IS'' AND ANY * EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE GROUP OR * ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * ==================================================================== * * This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many * individuals on behalf of the Apache Group and was originally based * on public domain software written at the National Center for * Supercomputing Applications, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign. * For more information on the Apache Group and the Apache HTTP server * project, please see . * */ /* * cronolog -- simple Apache log rotation program * * Copyright (c) 1996-1999 by Ford & Mason Ltd * * This software was submitted by Ford & Mason Ltd to the Apache * Software Foundation in December 1999. Future revisions and * derivatives of this source code must acknowledge Ford & Mason Ltd * as the original contributor of this module. All other licensing * and usage conditions are those of the Apache Software Foundation. * * Originally written by Andrew Ford * * cronolog is loosly based on the rotatelogs program, which is part of the * Apache package written by Ben Laurie * * The argument to this program is the log file name template as an * strftime format string. For example to generate new error and * access logs each day stored in subdirectories by year, month and day add * the following lines to the httpd.conf: * * TransferLog "|/www/etc/cronolog /www/logs/%Y/%m/%d/access.log" * ErrorLog "|/www/etc/cronolog /www/logs/%Y/%m/%d/error.log" * * The option "-x file" specifies that debugging messages should be * written to "file" (e.g. /dev/console) or to stderr if "file" is "-". */ #include "cronoutils.h" #include "getopt.h" /* Forward function declaration */ int new_log_file(const char *, const char *, mode_t, const char *, PERIODICITY, int, int, char *, size_t, time_t, time_t *); /* Definition of version and usage messages */ #ifndef _WIN32 #define VERSION_MSG PACKAGE " version " VERSION "\n" #else #define VERSION_MSG "cronolog version 0.1\n" #endif #define USAGE_MSG "usage: %s [OPTIONS] logfile-spec\n" \ "\n" \ " -H NAME, --hardlink=NAME maintain a hard link from NAME to current log\n" \ " -S NAME, --symlink=NAME maintain a symbolic link from NAME to current log\n" \ " -P NAME, --prev-symlink=NAME maintain a symbolic link from NAME to previous log\n" \ " -l NAME, --link=NAME same as -S/--symlink\n" \ " -h, --help print this help, then exit\n" \ " -p PERIOD, --period=PERIOD set the rotation period explicitly\n" \ " -d DELAY, --delay=DELAY set the rotation period delay\n" \ " -o, --once-only create single output log from template (not rotated)\n" \ " -x FILE, --debug=FILE write debug messages to FILE\n" \ " ( or to standard error if FILE is \"-\")\n" \ " -a, --american American date formats\n" \ " -e, --european European date formats (default)\n" \ " -s, --start-time=TIME starting time\n" \ " -z TZ, --time-zone=TZ use TZ for timezone\n" \ " -V, --version print version number, then exit\n" /* Definition of the short and long program options */ char *short_options = "ad:eop:s:z:H:P:S:l:hVx:"; #ifndef _WIN32 struct option long_options[] = { { "american", no_argument, NULL, 'a' }, { "european", no_argument, NULL, 'e' }, { "start-time", required_argument, NULL, 's' }, { "time-zone", required_argument, NULL, 'z' }, { "hardlink", required_argument, NULL, 'H' }, { "symlink", required_argument, NULL, 'S' }, { "prev-symlink", required_argument, NULL, 'P' }, { "link", required_argument, NULL, 'l' }, { "period", required_argument, NULL, 'p' }, { "delay", required_argument, NULL, 'd' }, { "once-only", no_argument, NULL, 'o' }, { "help", no_argument, NULL, 'h' }, { "version", no_argument, NULL, 'V' } }; #endif /* Main function. */ int main(int argc, char **argv) { PERIODICITY periodicity = UNKNOWN; PERIODICITY period_delay_units = UNKNOWN; int period_multiple = 1; int period_delay = 0; int use_american_date_formats = 0; char read_buf[BUFSIZE]; char tzbuf[BUFSIZE]; char filename[MAX_PATH]; char *start_time = NULL; char *template; char *linkname = NULL; char *prevlinkname = NULL; mode_t linktype = 0; int n_bytes_read; int ch; time_t time_now; time_t time_offset = 0; time_t next_period = 0; int log_fd = -1; #ifndef _WIN32 while ((ch = getopt_long(argc, argv, short_options, long_options, NULL)) != EOF) #else while ((ch = getopt(argc, argv, short_options)) != EOF) #endif { switch (ch) { case 'a': use_american_date_formats = 1; break; case 'e': use_american_date_formats = 0; break; case 's': start_time = optarg; break; case 'z': sprintf(tzbuf, "TZ=%s", optarg); putenv(tzbuf); break; case 'H': linkname = optarg; linktype = S_IFREG; break; case 'l': case 'S': linkname = optarg; #ifndef _WIN32 linktype = S_IFLNK; #endif break; case 'P': if (linkname == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "A current log symlink is needed to mantain a symlink to the previous log\n", argv[0]); exit(1); } prevlinkname = optarg; break; case 'd': period_delay_units = parse_timespec(optarg, &period_delay); break; case 'p': periodicity = parse_timespec(optarg, &period_multiple); if ( (periodicity == INVALID_PERIOD) || (periodicity == PER_SECOND) && (60 % period_multiple) || (periodicity == PER_MINUTE) && (60 % period_multiple) || (periodicity == HOURLY) && (24 % period_multiple) || (periodicity == DAILY) && (period_multiple > 365) || (periodicity == WEEKLY) && (period_multiple > 52) || (periodicity == MONTHLY) && (12 % period_multiple)) { fprintf(stderr, "%s: invalid explicit period specification (%s)\n", argv[0], start_time); exit(1); } break; case 'o': periodicity = ONCE_ONLY; break; case 'x': if (strcmp(optarg, "-") == 0) { debug_file = stderr; } else { debug_file = fopen(optarg, "a+"); } break; case 'V': fprintf(stderr, VERSION_MSG); exit(0); case 'h': case '?': fprintf(stderr, USAGE_MSG, argv[0]); exit(1); } } if ((argc - optind) != 1) { fprintf(stderr, USAGE_MSG, argv[0]); exit(1); } DEBUG((VERSION_MSG "\n")); if (start_time) { time_now = parse_time(start_time, use_american_date_formats); if (time_now == -1) { fprintf(stderr, "%s: invalid start time (%s)\n", argv[0], start_time); exit(1); } time_offset = time_now - time(NULL); DEBUG(("Using offset of %d seconds from real time\n", time_offset)); } /* The template should be the only argument. * Unless the -o option was specified, determine the periodicity. */ template = argv[optind]; if (periodicity == UNKNOWN) { periodicity = determine_periodicity(template); } DEBUG(("periodicity = %d %s\n", period_multiple, periods[periodicity])); if (period_delay) { if ( (period_delay_units > periodicity) || ( period_delay_units == periodicity && abs(period_delay) >= period_multiple)) { fprintf(stderr, "%s: period delay cannot be larger than the rollover period\n", argv[0], start_time); exit(1); } period_delay *= period_seconds[period_delay_units]; } DEBUG(("Rotation period is per %d %s\n", period_multiple, periods[periodicity])); /* Loop, waiting for data on standard input */ for (;;) { /* Read a buffer's worth of log file data, exiting on errors * or end of file. */ n_bytes_read = read(0, read_buf, sizeof read_buf); if (n_bytes_read == 0) { exit(3); } if (errno == EINTR) { continue; } else if (n_bytes_read < 0) { exit(4); } time_now = time(NULL) + time_offset; /* If the current period has finished and there is a log file * open, close the log file */ if ((time_now >= next_period) && (log_fd >= 0)) { close(log_fd); log_fd = -1; } /* If there is no log file open then open a new one. */ if (log_fd < 0) { log_fd = new_log_file(template, linkname, linktype, prevlinkname, periodicity, period_multiple, period_delay, filename, sizeof (filename), time_now, &next_period); } DEBUG(("%s (%d): wrote message; next period starts at %s (%d) in %d secs\n", timestamp(time_now), time_now, timestamp(next_period), next_period, next_period - time_now)); /* Write out the log data to the current log file. */ if (write(log_fd, read_buf, n_bytes_read) != n_bytes_read) { perror(filename); exit(5); } } /* NOTREACHED */ return 1; } /* Open a new log file: determine the start of the current * period, generate the log file name from the template, * determine the end of the period and open the new log file. * * Returns the file descriptor of the new log file and also sets the * name of the file and the start time of the next period via pointers * supplied. */ int new_log_file(const char *template, const char *linkname, mode_t linktype, const char *prevlinkname, PERIODICITY periodicity, int period_multiple, int period_delay, char *pfilename, size_t pfilename_len, time_t time_now, time_t *pnext_period) { time_t start_of_period; struct tm *tm; int log_fd; start_of_period = start_of_this_period(time_now, periodicity, period_multiple); tm = localtime(&start_of_period); strftime(pfilename, BUFSIZE, template, tm); *pnext_period = start_of_next_period(start_of_period, periodicity, period_multiple) + period_delay; DEBUG(("%s (%d): using log file \"%s\" from %s (%d) until %s (%d) (for %d secs)\n", timestamp(time_now), time_now, pfilename, timestamp(start_of_period), start_of_period, timestamp(*pnext_period), *pnext_period, *pnext_period - time_now)); log_fd = open(pfilename, O_WRONLY|O_CREAT|O_APPEND, FILE_MODE); #ifndef DONT_CREATE_SUBDIRS if ((log_fd < 0) && (errno == ENOENT)) { create_subdirs(pfilename); log_fd = open(pfilename, O_WRONLY|O_CREAT|O_APPEND, FILE_MODE); } #endif if (log_fd < 0) { perror(pfilename); exit(2); } if (linkname) { create_link(pfilename, linkname, linktype, prevlinkname); } return log_fd; } cronolog-1.6.2/src/cronosplit0000664000031100003110000002271107274305366011732 #!/usr/bin/perl -- # -*- perl -*- # ==================================================================== # Copyright (c) 1995-1999 The Apache Group. All rights reserved. # # Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without # modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions # are met: # # 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright # notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. # # 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright # notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in # the documentation and/or other materials provided with the # distribution. # # 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this # software must display the following acknowledgment: # "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group # for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." # # 4. The names "Apache Server" and "Apache Group" must not be used to # endorse or promote products derived from this software without # prior written permission. For written permission, please contact # apache@apache.org. # # 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache" # nor may "Apache" appear in their names without prior written # permission of the Apache Group. # # 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following # acknowledgment: # "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group # for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)." # # THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP ``AS IS'' AND ANY # EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE # IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR # PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE GROUP OR # ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, # SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT # NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; # LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) # HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, # STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) # ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED # OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. # ==================================================================== # # This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many # individuals on behalf of the Apache Group and was originally based # on public domain software written at the National Center for # Supercomputing Applications, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign. # For more information on the Apache Group and the Apache HTTP server # project, please see . # # # cronosplit -- split log files into cronolog-compatible logs # # Copyright (c) 1996-1999 by Ford & Mason Ltd # # This software was submitted by Ford & Mason Ltd to the Apache # Software Foundation in December 1999. Future revisions and # derivatives of this source code must acknowledge Ford & Mason Ltd # as the original contributor of this module. All other licensing # and usage conditions are those of the Apache Software Foundation. # # cronosplit is loosly based on the splitlog script by # Roy Fielding # (splitlog is part of the wwwstat package, # see ) use Getopt::Long; $program = 'cronosplit'; $version = '1.6.2'; # Parameters $MaxHandles = 50; $DirMode = 0775; # Patterns for log file entries (Common Log Format) and timestamps $log_entry_pattern = "^(\\S+) (\\S+) ([^[]+) \\[([^]]*)] \"([^\"]*)\" (\\S+) (\\S+)(.*)"; $timestamp_pattern = "^([ 0-3]?\\d)/([A-Za-z]+)/(\\d{4}):(\\d\\d):(\\d\\d):(\\d\\d) [+ -]\\d{1,4}"; # An associative array of month names and abbreviations %month = (Jan => 1, January => 1, Feb => 2, February => 2, Mar => 3, March => 3, Apr => 4, April => 4, May => 5, Jun => 6, June => 6, Jul => 7, July => 7, Aug => 8, August => 8, Sep => 9, September => 9, Sept => 9, Oct => 10, October => 10, Nov => 11, November => 11, Dec => 12, December => 12); @month = ("", "January", "February", "March", "April", "May", "June", "July", "August", "September", "October", "November", "December"); @mmm = ("", "Jan", "Feb", "Mar", "Apr", "May", "Jun", "Jul", "Aug", "Sep", "Oct", "Nov", "Dec"); @days = ("Sunday", "Monday", "Tuesday", "Wednesday", "Thursday", "Friday", "Saturday"); @ddd = ("Sun", "Mon", "Tue", "Wed", "Thu", "Fri", "Sat"); # Process options (GetOptions("template=s", \$template, "print-invalid", \$PrintInvalids, "debug", \$debug, "verbose", \$verbose, "help", \$print_help, "version", \$print_version) and ($print_help or $print_version or $template)) or $print_help++; $verbose++ if $debug; # --debug implies --verbose # If version number requested, print it and exit if ($print_version) { print < $program is part of the cronolog package. The latest version of which can be found at: http://www.ford-mason.co.uk/resources/cronolog/ EOF exit(0); } # If help requested, print it and exit if ($print_help) { print <) { my($host, $ident, $authuser, $timestamp, $request, $status, $bytes, $trailer) = /$log_entry_pattern/; if (!($host && $ident && $authuser && $timestamp && $request && $status)) { if ($PrintInvalids) { print STDERR "$.:$saveline"; } next LINE; } if ($timestamp =~ /$timestamp_pattern/) { ($day, $mon, $year, $hour, $min, $sec) = ($1, $2, $3, $4, $5, $6); } else { if ($PrintInvalids) { print STDERR "$.:$saveline"; } next LINE; } next LINE unless defined($outfile = &get_handle($template, $day, $mon, $year, $hour, $min, $sec)); print($outfile $host, ' ', $ident, ' ', $authuser, ' [', $timestamp, '] "', $request, '" ', $status, ' ', $bytes, $trailer, "\n"); } close(INFILE); } # Get a file handle for a log file, closing the oldest handle if there # are too many handles open sub get_handle { my($template, $day, $mon, $year, $hour, $min, $sec) = @_; $mon = $month{$mon}; # Determine the filename from the template and time my($file) = $template; $file =~ s/%Y/sprintf("%04d", $year)/eg; $file =~ s/%m/sprintf("%02d", $mon)/eg; $file =~ s/%d/sprintf("%02d", $day)/eg; $file =~ s/%b/$mmm[$mon]/g; $file =~ s/%B/$month[$mon]/g; $file =~ s/%H/sprintf("%02d", $hour)/eg; $file =~ s/%M/sprintf("%02m", $min)/eg; $file =~ s/%S/sprintf("%02m", $sec)/eg; # See if we already have it open and ready to write return $handle if defined($handle = $OpenHandles{$file}); # See if we already have too many files opened if (($#HandlesInUse + 1) >= $MaxHandles) { local($oldkey) = shift @HandlesInUse; # close the oldest $handle = $OpenHandles{$oldkey}; delete $OpenHandles{$oldkey}; close $handle; } # Finally, try to open and remember a new handle for this pathkey $handle = ++$NextHandle; make_dirs($file); if (open($handle, ">>$file")) { push(@HandlesInUse, $file); $OpenHandles{$file} = $handle; return $handle; } else { warn "Failed open of $file: $!\n"; return undef; } } # Make any missing directories on the path specified # (this subroutine is not optimal). sub make_dirs { my($path) = shift; my($abs); # Strip off the filename bit $path =~ s!/[^/]*$!! or return; # Return early if the directory exists return if -d $path; # Trim off any leading '/' (remembering whether the path was # absolute or relative) $path =~ s!^(/)!!; $abs = $1; # Split what's left into directories my(@path) = split(/\//, $path); # Check each directory on the path foreach $i (0 .. $#path) { $path = $abs . join("/", (@path[0 .. $i])); print(STDERR "Testing $path\n") if $debug; print(STDERR "Making $path\n") if !-d $path and $debug; mkdir($path, $DirMode) unless -d $path; } } cronolog-1.6.2/doc/0000777000031100003110000000000007274470015007642 5cronolog-1.6.2/doc/Makefile.in0000664000031100003110000002217507274470014011633 # Makefile.in generated automatically by automake 1.4 from Makefile.am # Copyright (C) 1994, 1995-8, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without # even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A # PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SHELL = @SHELL@ srcdir = @srcdir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ prefix = @prefix@ exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ bindir = @bindir@ sbindir = @sbindir@ libexecdir = @libexecdir@ datadir = @datadir@ sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ localstatedir = @localstatedir@ libdir = @libdir@ infodir = @infodir@ mandir = @mandir@ includedir = @includedir@ oldincludedir = /usr/include DESTDIR = pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ top_builddir = .. ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ INSTALL = @INSTALL@ INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ $(AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS) INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ transform = @program_transform_name@ NORMAL_INSTALL = : PRE_INSTALL = : POST_INSTALL = : NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : PRE_UNINSTALL = : POST_UNINSTALL = : CC = @CC@ LN_S = @LN_S@ MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ PERL = @PERL@ RANLIB = @RANLIB@ VERSION = @VERSION@ info_TEXINFOS = cronolog.texi man_MANS = cronolog.1m cronosplit.1m # This shouldn't be necessary EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS) $(info_TEXINFOS) mkinstalldirs = $(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = TEXI2DVI = texi2dvi INFO_DEPS = cronolog.info DVIS = cronolog.dvi TEXINFOS = cronolog.texi man1dir = $(mandir)/man1 MANS = $(man_MANS) NROFF = nroff DIST_COMMON = Makefile.am Makefile.in texinfo.tex DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) TAR = gtar GZIP_ENV = --best all: all-redirect .SUFFIXES: .SUFFIXES: .dvi .info .ps .texi .texinfo .txi $(srcdir)/Makefile.in: Makefile.am $(top_srcdir)/configure.in $(ACLOCAL_M4) cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu --include-deps doc/Makefile Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status cd $(top_builddir) \ && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status cronolog.info: cronolog.texi cronolog.dvi: cronolog.texi DVIPS = dvips .texi.info: @cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9] cd $(srcdir) \ && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'` .texi.dvi: TEXINPUTS=.:$$TEXINPUTS \ MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) -I $(srcdir)' $(TEXI2DVI) $< .texi: @cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9] cd $(srcdir) \ && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'` .texinfo.info: @cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9] cd $(srcdir) \ && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'` .texinfo: @cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9] cd $(srcdir) \ && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'` .texinfo.dvi: TEXINPUTS=.:$$TEXINPUTS \ MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) -I $(srcdir)' $(TEXI2DVI) $< .txi.info: @cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9] cd $(srcdir) \ && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'` .txi.dvi: TEXINPUTS=.:$$TEXINPUTS \ MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) -I $(srcdir)' $(TEXI2DVI) $< .txi: @cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9] cd $(srcdir) \ && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'` .dvi.ps: $(DVIPS) $< -o $@ install-info-am: $(INFO_DEPS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir) @list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \ for file in $$list; do \ d=$(srcdir); \ for ifile in `cd $$d && echo $$file $$file-[0-9] $$file-[0-9][0-9]`; do \ if test -f $$d/$$ifile; then \ echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$d/$$ifile $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$ifile"; \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$d/$$ifile $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$ifile; \ else : ; fi; \ done; \ done @$(POST_INSTALL) @if $(SHELL) -c 'install-info --version | sed 1q | fgrep -s -v -i debian' >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \ for file in $$list; do \ echo " install-info --info-dir=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$file";\ install-info --info-dir=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$file || :;\ done; \ else : ; fi uninstall-info: $(PRE_UNINSTALL) @if $(SHELL) -c 'install-info --version | sed 1q | fgrep -s -v -i debian' >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ ii=yes; \ else ii=; fi; \ list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \ for file in $$list; do \ test -z "$ii" \ || install-info --info-dir=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir) --remove $$file; \ done @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \ for file in $$list; do \ (cd $(DESTDIR)$(infodir) && rm -f $$file $$file-[0-9] $$file-[0-9][0-9]); \ done dist-info: $(INFO_DEPS) list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \ for base in $$list; do \ d=$(srcdir); \ for file in `cd $$d && eval echo $$base*`; do \ test -f $(distdir)/$$file \ || ln $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file 2> /dev/null \ || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file; \ done; \ done mostlyclean-aminfo: -rm -f cronolog.aux cronolog.cp cronolog.cps cronolog.dvi cronolog.fn \ cronolog.fns cronolog.ky cronolog.kys cronolog.ps \ cronolog.log cronolog.pg cronolog.toc cronolog.tp \ cronolog.tps cronolog.vr cronolog.vrs cronolog.op cronolog.tr \ cronolog.cv cronolog.cn clean-aminfo: distclean-aminfo: maintainer-clean-aminfo: cd $(srcdir) && for i in $(INFO_DEPS); do \ rm -f $$i; \ if test "`echo $$i-[0-9]*`" != "$$i-[0-9]*"; then \ rm -f $$i-[0-9]*; \ fi; \ done install-man1: $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir) @list='$(man1_MANS)'; \ l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do \ case "$$i" in \ *.1*) list="$$list $$i" ;; \ esac; \ done; \ for i in $$list; do \ if test -f $(srcdir)/$$i; then file=$(srcdir)/$$i; \ else file=$$i; fi; \ ext=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/^.*\\.//'`; \ inst=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/\\.[0-9a-z]*$$//'`; \ inst=`echo $$inst | sed '$(transform)'`.$$ext; \ echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst"; \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst; \ done uninstall-man1: @list='$(man1_MANS)'; \ l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do \ case "$$i" in \ *.1*) list="$$list $$i" ;; \ esac; \ done; \ for i in $$list; do \ ext=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/^.*\\.//'`; \ inst=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/\\.[0-9a-z]*$$//'`; \ inst=`echo $$inst | sed '$(transform)'`.$$ext; \ echo " rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst"; \ rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst; \ done install-man: $(MANS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-man1 uninstall-man: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) uninstall-man1 tags: TAGS TAGS: distdir = $(top_builddir)/$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir) subdir = doc distdir: $(DISTFILES) @for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ d=$(srcdir); \ if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ cp -pr $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file; \ else \ test -f $(distdir)/$$file \ || ln $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file 2> /dev/null \ || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file || :; \ fi; \ done $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) top_distdir="$(top_distdir)" distdir="$(distdir)" dist-info info-am: $(INFO_DEPS) info: info-am dvi-am: $(DVIS) dvi: dvi-am check-am: all-am check: check-am installcheck-am: installcheck: installcheck-am install-exec-am: install-exec: install-exec-am install-data-am: install-info-am install-man install-data: install-data-am install-am: all-am @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am install: install-am uninstall-am: uninstall-info uninstall-man uninstall: uninstall-am all-am: Makefile $(INFO_DEPS) $(MANS) all-redirect: all-am install-strip: $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS=-s install installdirs: $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir) $(DESTDIR)$(mandir)/man1 mostlyclean-generic: clean-generic: distclean-generic: -rm -f Makefile $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) -rm -f config.cache config.log stamp-h stamp-h[0-9]* maintainer-clean-generic: mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am clean-am: clean-aminfo clean-generic mostlyclean-am clean: clean-am distclean-am: distclean-aminfo distclean-generic clean-am distclean: distclean-am maintainer-clean-am: maintainer-clean-aminfo maintainer-clean-generic \ distclean-am @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am .PHONY: install-info-am uninstall-info mostlyclean-aminfo \ distclean-aminfo clean-aminfo maintainer-clean-aminfo install-man1 \ uninstall-man1 install-man uninstall-man tags distdir info-am info \ dvi-am dvi check check-am installcheck-am installcheck install-exec-am \ install-exec install-data-am install-data install-am install \ uninstall-am uninstall all-redirect all-am all installdirs \ mostlyclean-generic distclean-generic clean-generic \ maintainer-clean-generic clean mostlyclean distclean maintainer-clean # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: cronolog-1.6.2/doc/Makefile.am0000644000031100003110000000031106324756706011616 ## Process this file with automake to create Makefile.in info_TEXINFOS = cronolog.texi man_MANS = cronolog.1m cronosplit.1m # This shouldn't be necessary EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS) $(info_TEXINFOS) cronolog-1.6.2/doc/texinfo.tex0000644000031100003110000046764006324760632011777 %% TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. %% $Id: texinfo.tex,v 1.1 1997/04/15 20:14:18 andrew Exp $ % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, % 94, 95, 96, 97 Free Software Foundation, Inc. %This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or %modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as %published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at %your option) any later version. %This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be %useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty %of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU %General Public License for more details. %You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License %along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write %to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, %Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. %In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program. %You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve %what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding! % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@prep.ai.mit.edu. % Please include a *precise* test case in each bug report. % Make it possible to create a .fmt file just by loading this file: % if the underlying format is not loaded, start by loading it now. % Added by gildea November 1993. \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi % This automatically updates the version number based on RCS. \def\deftexinfoversion$#1: #2 ${\def\texinfoversion{#2}} \deftexinfoversion$Revision: 1.1 $ \message{Loading texinfo package [Version \texinfoversion]:} % If in a .fmt file, print the version number % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because % they might have appeared in the input file name. \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}\message{} \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine. \let\ptexb=\b \let\ptexbullet=\bullet \let\ptexc=\c \let\ptexcomma=\, \let\ptexdot=\. \let\ptexdots=\dots \let\ptexend=\end \let\ptexequiv = \equiv \let\ptexi=\i \let\ptexlbrace=\{ \let\ptexrbrace=\} \let\ptexstar=\* \let\ptext=\t % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. {\catcode`@ = 11 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble % if the definition is written into an index file. \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } } \message{Basics,} \chardef\other=12 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it % starts a new line in the output. \newlinechar = `^^J % Set up fixed words for English. \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined{\gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}}\fi% \def\putwordInfo{Info}% \ifx\putwordSee\undefined{\gdef\putwordSee{See}}\fi% \ifx\putwordsee\undefined{\gdef\putwordsee{see}}\fi% \ifx\putwordfile\undefined{\gdef\putwordfile{file}}\fi% \ifx\putwordpage\undefined{\gdef\putwordpage{page}}\fi% \ifx\putwordsection\undefined{\gdef\putwordsection{section}}\fi% \ifx\putwordSection\undefined{\gdef\putwordSection{Section}}\fi% \ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}}\fi% \ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}}\fi% \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined{\gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}}\fi% % Ignore a token. % \def\gobble#1{} \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix} \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers} \hyphenation{eshell} % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. \newdimen \bindingoffset \newdimen \normaloffset \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. % \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2 \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen }% %---------------------Begin change----------------------- % %%%% For @cropmarks command. % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 % \newdimen\cornerlong \newdimen\cornerthick \newdimen \topandbottommargin \newdimen \outerhsize \newdimen \outervsize \cornerlong=1pc\cornerthick=.3pt % These set size of cropmarks \outerhsize=7in %\outervsize=9.5in % Alternative @smallbook page size is 9.25in \outervsize=9.25in \topandbottommargin=.75in % %---------------------End change----------------------- % Main output routine. \chardef\PAGE = 255 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} \newbox\headlinebox \newbox\footlinebox % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. \def\onepageout#1{% \hoffset=\normaloffset \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi % % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% % {% % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends % before the \shipout runs. % \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. \shipout\vbox{% \unvbox\headlinebox \pagebody{#1}% \unvbox\footlinebox }% }% \advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi } %%%% For @cropmarks command %%%% % Here is a modification of the main output routine for Near East Publications % This provides right-angle cropmarks at all four corners. % The contents of the page are centerlined into the cropmarks, % and any desired binding offset is added as an \hskip on either % site of the centerlined box. (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) % \def\croppageout#1{\hoffset=0pt % make sure this doesn't mess things up {\escapechar=`\\\relax % makes sure backslash is used in output files. \shipout \vbox to \outervsize{\hsize=\outerhsize \vbox{\line{\ewtop\hfill\ewtop}} \nointerlineskip \line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop} \hfill \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}} \vskip \topandbottommargin \centerline{\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi \vbox{ {\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline} \pagebody{#1} {\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}} \ifodd\pageno\else\hskip\bindingoffset\fi} \vskip \topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill \boxmaxdepth\cornerthick \line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot} \hfill \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}} \nointerlineskip \vbox{\line{\ewbot\hfill\ewbot}} }} \advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi} % % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks \def\cropmarks{\let\onepageout=\croppageout } \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} {\catcode`\@ =11 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} } % % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) % \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} \def\nstop{\vbox {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} \def\nsbot{\vbox {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. % \def\parsearg#1{% \let\next = #1% \begingroup \obeylines \futurelet\temp\parseargx } % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or % the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done. \def\parseargx{% % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces. \ifx\obeyedspace\temp \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace \else \expandafter\parseargline \fi } % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call). {\obeyspaces % \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}} {\obeylines % \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. % % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment. % Result of each macro is put in \toks0. \argremovec #1\c\relax % \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax % % % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg. \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}% }% } % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX % do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is % just to delimit the argument to the \c. \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g., % @end itemize @c foo % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the % `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the % result to \toks0. % % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded. % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed % here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it. % \def\removeactivespaces#1{% \begingroup \ignoreactivespaces \edef\temp{#1}% \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}% \endgroup } % Change the active space to expand to nothing. % \begingroup \obeyspaces \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty} \endgroup \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup) \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi} \def\ENVcheck{% \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment. Type Return to continue.} \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage % @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now. \newhelp\EMsimple{Type to continue.} \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx} \def\beginxxx #1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else \csname #1\endcsname\fi} % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. % \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx} \def\endxxx #1{% \removeactivespaces{#1}% \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}% % \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo. \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}% \else \unmatchedenderror\endthing \fi \else % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started. \csname E\endthing\endcsname \fi } % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error. % \def\unmatchedenderror#1{% \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}% } % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error. % \def\defineunmatchedend#1{% \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}% } % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in % \nonfillstart and \quotations). \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt \def\singlespace{% % Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below % environments. --karl, 6may93 %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip %\kern \baselineskip}% \setleading \singlespaceskip } %% Simple single-character @ commands % @@ prints an @ % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). \def\@{{\tt \char '100}} % This is turned off because it was never documented % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' %% but suppressing ligatures. %\def\`{{`}} %\def\'{{'}} % Used to generate quoted braces. \def\mylbrace {{\tt \char '173}} \def\myrbrace {{\tt \char '175}} \let\{=\mylbrace \let\}=\myrbrace \begingroup % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index. \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12 @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]% @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]% @endgroup % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H. \let\, = \c \let\dotaccent = \. \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} \let\tieaccent = \t \let\ubaraccent = \b \let\udotaccent = \d % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss. \def\questiondown{?`} \def\exclamdown{!`} % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. \def\imacro{i} \def\jmacro{j} \def\dotless#1{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% \fi\fi } % @: forces normal size whitespace following. \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } % @* forces a line break. \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} % @. is an end-of-sentence period. \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. \gdef\enddots{$\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}$\spacefactor=3000} % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. \gdef\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } % @? is an end-of-sentence query. \gdef\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and % the text is small, which looks bad. % \def\group{\begingroup \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% \fi % % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space % above. But it's pretty close. \def\Egroup{% \egroup % End the \vtop. \endgroup % End the \group. }% % \vtop\bgroup % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it. % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself. % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line. \everypar = {\strut}% % % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's % normal interline spacing. \offinterlineskip % % OK, but now we have to do something about blank % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an % empty paragraph. \ifx\par\lisppar \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}% % % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par. \obeylines \fi % % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. \comment } % % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. % \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% where each line of input produces a line of output.} % @need space-in-mils % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in \def\need{\parsearg\needx} % Old definition--didn't work. %\def\needx #1{\par % %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally %% if the depth of the box does not fit. %{\baselineskip=0pt% %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\penalty 10000 %\prevdepth=-1000pt %}} \def\needx#1{% % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a % paragraph. \par % % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page % break, since the best break might be right here. \allowbreak \nointerlineskip \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}% % % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. % % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. \penalty9999 % % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. \kern -#1\mil % % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. \nobreak } % @br forces paragraph break \let\br = \par % @dots{} output some dots \def\dots{$\ldots$} % @page forces the start of a new page \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} % @exdent text.... % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. % That's how much \exdent should take out. \newskip\exdentamount % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy} \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy} \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} % @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph. \def\inmargin#1{% \strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}} \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} %\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} % @include file insert text of that file as input. % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name). \def\include{\begingroup \catcode`\\=12 \catcode`~=12 \catcode`^=12 \catcode`_=12 \catcode`|=12 \catcode`<=12 \catcode`>=12 \catcode`+=12 \parsearg\includezzz} % Restore active chars for included file. \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work. \def\thisfile{#1}% \input\thisfile \endgroup} \def\thisfile{} % @center line outputs that line, centered \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz} \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip \advance\hsize by -\rightskip \centerline{#1}}} % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx} \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip} % @comment ...line which is ignored... % @c is the same as @comment % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment \def\comment{\catcode 64=\other \catcode 123=\other \catcode 125=\other% \parsearg \commentxxx} \def\commentxxx #1{\catcode 64=0 \catcode 123=1 \catcode 125=2 } \let\c=\comment % @paragraphindent is defined for the Info formatting commands only. \let\paragraphindent=\comment % Prevent errors for section commands. % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals. \def\ignoresections{% \let\chapter=\relax \let\unnumbered=\relax \let\top=\relax \let\unnumberedsec=\relax \let\unnumberedsection=\relax \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax \let\section=\relax \let\subsec=\relax \let\subsubsec=\relax \let\subsection=\relax \let\subsubsection=\relax \let\appendix=\relax \let\appendixsec=\relax \let\appendixsection=\relax \let\appendixsubsec=\relax \let\appendixsubsection=\relax \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax \let\contents=\relax \let\smallbook=\relax \let\titlepage=\relax } % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used % incorrectly. % \def\ignoremorecommands{% \let\defcodeindex = \relax \let\defcv = \relax \let\deffn = \relax \let\deffnx = \relax \let\defindex = \relax \let\defivar = \relax \let\defmac = \relax \let\defmethod = \relax \let\defop = \relax \let\defopt = \relax \let\defspec = \relax \let\deftp = \relax \let\deftypefn = \relax \let\deftypefun = \relax \let\deftypevar = \relax \let\deftypevr = \relax \let\defun = \relax \let\defvar = \relax \let\defvr = \relax \let\ref = \relax \let\xref = \relax \let\printindex = \relax \let\pxref = \relax \let\settitle = \relax \let\setchapternewpage = \relax \let\setchapterstyle = \relax \let\everyheading = \relax \let\evenheading = \relax \let\oddheading = \relax \let\everyfooting = \relax \let\evenfooting = \relax \let\oddfooting = \relax \let\headings = \relax \let\include = \relax \let\lowersections = \relax \let\down = \relax \let\raisesections = \relax \let\up = \relax \let\set = \relax \let\clear = \relax \let\item = \relax } % Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore. % \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} % Also ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @html, @menu, and @direntry text. % \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} \def\html{\doignore{html}} \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} % Also ignore @macro ... @end macro. The user must run texi2dvi, % which runs makeinfo to do macro expansion. Ignore @unmacro, too. \def\macro{\doignore{macro}} \let\unmacro = \comment % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. \let\dircategory = \comment % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'. % \def\doignore#1{\begingroup % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. \ignoresections % % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'. \long\def\doignoretext##1\end #1{\enddoignore}% % % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. \catcode32 = 10 % % And now expand that command. \doignoretext } % What we do to finish off ignored text. % \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse \def\obstexwarn{% \ifwarnedobs\relax\else % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0. % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines. \immediate\write16{} \immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!} \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).} \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.} \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.} \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.} \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)} \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the} \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution} \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.} \immediate\write16{} \global\warnedobstrue \fi } % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed), % uncomment the following line: %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command. % \def\nestedignore#1{% \obstexwarn % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font. % \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. \ignoresections % % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the % @end command again. \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}% % % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we % undefine them. % % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately; % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors. \ignoremorecommands % % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of % stuff compared to the main input. % \nullfont \let\tenrm = \nullfont \let\tenit = \nullfont \let\tensl = \nullfont \let\tenbf = \nullfont \let\tentt = \nullfont \let\smallcaps = \nullfont \let\tensf = \nullfont % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in % smallexample) \let\indrm = \nullfont \let\indit = \nullfont \let\indsl = \nullfont \let\indbf = \nullfont \let\indtt = \nullfont \let\indsc = \nullfont \let\indsf = \nullfont % % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts. \tracinglostchars = 0 % % Don't bother to do space factor calculations. \frenchspacing % % Don't report underfull hboxes. \hbadness = 10000 % % Do minimal line-breaking. \pretolerance = 10000 % % Do not execute instructions in @tex \def\tex{\doignore{tex}} } % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. % % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we % didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid % losing inside @example, for instance. % \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10 \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR. \parsearg\setxxx} \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% \def\temp{#2}% \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. \fi \endgroup } % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'. \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}} % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. % \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx} \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax} % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. % \def\value{\begingroup \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR. \valuexxx} \def\valuexxx#1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax {\{No value for ``#1''\}}% \else \csname SET#1\endcsname \fi \endgroup} % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined % with @set. % \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx} \def\ifsetxxx #1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax \expandafter\ifsetfail \else \expandafter\ifsetsucceed \fi } \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}} \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}} \defineunmatchedend{ifset} % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. % \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx} \def\ifclearxxx #1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax \expandafter\ifclearsucceed \else \expandafter\ifclearfail \fi } \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}} \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}} \defineunmatchedend{ifclear} % @iftex always succeeds; we read the text following, through @end % iftex). But `@end iftex' should be valid only after an @iftex. % \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}} \defineunmatchedend{iftex} % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it % at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since % the @ifset might be nested.) % \def\conditionalsucceed#1{% \edef\temp{% % Remember the current value of \E#1. \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}% % % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value. \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}% }% \temp } % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the % control sequences after we've constructed them. % \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. % \def\asis#1{#1} % @math means output in math mode. % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control % sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then, % we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they % should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a % control sequence to switch into and out of math mode. % % This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it % seems unlikely it will ever be needed there. % \let\implicitmath = $ \def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath} % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath} \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath} \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz} \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]} \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} \let\nwnode=\node \let\lastnode=\relax \def\donoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}\fi \global\let\lastnode=\relax} \def\unnumbnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\unnumbsetref{\lastnode}\fi \global\let\lastnode=\relax} \def\appendixnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\appendixsetref{\lastnode}\fi \global\let\lastnode=\relax} % @refill is a no-op. \let\refill=\relax % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. \def\setfilename{% \readauxfile \opencontents \openindices \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. \comment % Ignore the actual filename. } % @bye. \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} % \def\macro#1{\begingroup\ignoresections\catcode`\#=6\def\macrotemp{#1}\parsearg\macroxxx} % \def\macroxxx#1#2 \end macro{% % \expandafter\gdef\macrotemp#1{#2}% % \endgroup} %\def\linemacro#1{\begingroup\ignoresections\catcode`\#=6\def\macrotemp{#1}\parsearg\linemacroxxx} %\def\linemacroxxx#1#2 \end linemacro{% %\let\parsearg=\relax %\edef\macrotempx{\csname M\butfirst\expandafter\string\macrotemp\endcsname}% %\expandafter\xdef\macrotemp{\parsearg\macrotempx}% %\expandafter\gdef\macrotempx#1{#2}% %\endgroup} %\def\butfirst#1{} \message{fonts,} % Font-change commands. % Texinfo supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc. \newfam\sffam \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf} \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. % We don't need math for this one. \def\ttsl{\tenttsl} %% Try out Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf \let\mainmagstep=\magstephalf % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} % Use cm as the default font prefix. % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix % before you read in texinfo.tex. \ifx\fontprefix\undefined \def\fontprefix{cm} \fi % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. \def\rmshape{r} \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold \def\bfshape{b} \def\bxshape{bx} \def\ttshape{tt} \def\ttbshape{tt} \def\ttslshape{sltt} \def\itshape{ti} \def\itbshape{bxti} \def\slshape{sl} \def\slbshape{bxsl} \def\sfshape{ss} \def\sfbshape{ss} \def\scshape{csc} \def\scbshape{csc} \ifx\bigger\relax \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000} \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000} \else \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \fi % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10. % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10 % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10. \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep % A few fonts for @defun, etc. \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} % Fonts for indices and small examples (9pt). % We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic, % because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that. % Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they % aren't very useful. \setfont\ninett\ttshape{9}{1000} \setfont\indrm\rmshape{9}{1000} \setfont\indit\slshape{9}{1000} \let\indsl=\indit \let\indtt=\ninett \let\indttsl=\ninett \let\indsf=\indrm \let\indbf=\indrm \setfont\indsc\scshape{10}{900} \font\indi=cmmi9 \font\indsy=cmsy9 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep2} \let\chapbf=\chaprm \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 % Section fonts (14.4pt). \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} \let\secbf\secrm \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 % \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} % This size an font looked bad. % \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1} % The letters were too crowded. % \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1} % \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} % \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1} %\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx. %\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than %\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315} % being scaled magstep1. %\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315} %\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315} %\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1} \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} \let\ssecbf\ssecrm \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1} \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5, % but that is not a standard magnification. % Fonts for title page: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} \let\authorrm = \secrm % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we % don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would % also require loading a lot more fonts). % \def\resetmathfonts{% \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf } % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead % of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most % cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam % \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to % redefine \bf itself. \def\textfonts{% \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl \resetmathfonts} \def\chapfonts{% \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} \def\secfonts{% \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} \def\subsecfonts{% \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf? \def\indexfonts{% \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \let\tenttsl=\indttsl \resetmathfonts \setleading{12pt}} % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. % \textfonts % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 % Fonts for short table of contents. \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000} \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction % unless the following character is such as not to need one. \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi} \def\smartitalic#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} \let\i=\smartitalic \let\var=\smartitalic \let\dfn=\smartitalic \let\emph=\smartitalic \let\cite=\smartitalic \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} \let\strong=\b % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. % \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } \def\t#1{% {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% \null } \let\ttfont=\t \def\samp #1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{8}{1000} \font\smallsy=cmsy9 \def\key#1{{\smallrm\textfont2=\smallsy \leavevmode\hbox{% \raise0.4pt\hbox{$\langle$}\kern-.08em\vtop{% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{$\langle$}}#1}}% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{$\rangle$}}}} % The old definition, with no lozenge: %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} \let\file=\samp \let\url=\samp % perhaps include a hypertex \special eventually \def\email#1{$\langle${\tt #1}$\rangle$} % @code is a modification of @t, % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. \def\tclose#1{% {% % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font % % Switch to typewriter. \tt % % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% % % Turn off hyphenation. \nohyphenation % \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1% }% \null } % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code. % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. % -- rms. { \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active \catcode`\|=\active \global\def\code{\begingroup \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder \codex} % The following is used by \doprintindex to insure that long function names % wrap around. It is necessary for - and _ to be active before the index is % read from the file, as \entry parses the arguments long before \code is % ever called. -- mycroft % _ is always active; and it shouldn't be \let = to an _ that is a % subscript character anyway. Then, @cindex @samp{_} (for example) % fails. --karl \global\def\indexbreaks{% \catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash } } \def\realdash{-} \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} \def\codeunder{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}} \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} %\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, % then @kbd has no effect. % \def\xkey{\key} \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% \else{\tclose{\ttsl\look}}\fi \else{\tclose{\ttsl\look}}\fi} % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have % this property, we can check that font parameter. % \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of % @dmn{}pt. % \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font % Use of \lowercase was suggested. \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font % @pounds{} is a sterling sign. \def\pounds{{\it\$}} \message{page headings,} \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. \def\titlefont#1{{\titlerm #1}} \newif\ifseenauthor \newif\iffinishedtitlepage \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz} \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm % I deinstalled the following change because \cmr12 is undefined. % This change was not in the ChangeLog anyway. --rms. % \let\subtitlerm=\cmr12 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}% % \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}% % % Leave some space at the very top of the page. \vglue\titlepagetopglue % % Now you can print the title using @title. \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}% \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefont{##1}} % print a rule at the page bottom also. \finishedtitlepagefalse \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}% % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. \finishedtitlepagetrue % % Now you can put text using @subtitle. \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}% \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}% % % @author should come last, but may come many times. \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}% \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}% % % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. \let\oldpage = \page \def\page{% \iffinishedtitlepage\else \finishtitlepage \fi \oldpage \let\page = \oldpage \hbox{}}% % \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}} } \def\Etitlepage{% \iffinishedtitlepage\else \finishtitlepage \fi % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. \oldpage \endgroup \HEADINGSon } \def\finishtitlepage{% \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize \vskip\titlepagebottomglue \finishedtitlepagetrue } %%% Set up page headings and footings. \let\thispage=\folio \newtoks \evenheadline % Token sequence for heading line of even pages \newtoks \oddheadline % Token sequence for heading line of odd pages \newtoks \evenfootline % Token sequence for footing line of even pages \newtoks \oddfootline % Token sequence for footing line of odd pages % Now make Tex use those variables \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} \let\HEADINGShook=\relax % Commands to set those variables. % For example, this is what @headings on does % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle % @evenfooting @thisfile|| % @oddfooting ||@thisfile \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx} \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx} {\catcode`\@=0 % \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \gdef\everyheadingxxx #1{\everyheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\everyheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \gdef\everyfootingxxx #1{\everyfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\everyfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} \global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} % }% unbind the catcode of @. % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. % @headings off turns them off. % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. % By default, they are off at the start of a document, % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} \def\HEADINGSoff{ \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} \HEADINGSoff % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top % edge of all pages. \def\HEADINGSdouble{ \global\pageno=1 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage } \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, % page number on top right. \def\HEADINGSsingle{ \global\pageno=1 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager } \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage } \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager } % Subroutines used in generating headings % Produces Day Month Year style of output. \def\today{\number\day\space \ifcase\month\or January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi \space\number\year} % Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output. %\def\today{\ifcase\month\or %January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or %July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi %\space\number\day, \number\year} % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings % It generates no output of its own \def\thistitle{No Title} \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz} \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}} \message{tables,} % @tabs -- simple alignment % These don't work. For one thing, \+ is defined as outer. % So these macros cannot even be defined. %\def\tabs{\parsearg\tabszzz} %\def\tabszzz #1{\settabs\+#1\cr} %\def\tabline{\parsearg\tablinezzz} %\def\tablinezzz #1{\+#1\cr} %\def\&{&} % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x). % default indentation of table text \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in % margin between end of table item and start of table text. \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin \newdimen\itemmax % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with % these defs. % They also define \itemindex % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz} \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz} \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz} \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz} \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}% \itemzzz {#1}} \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}% \itemzzz {#1}} \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % \advance\hsize by -\rightskip \advance\hsize by -\tableindent \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}% \itemindex{#1}% \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. % % Be sure we are not still in the middle of a paragraph. %{\parskip = 0in %\par %}% % % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax % % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, % but leave it ragged-right. \begingroup \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent \advance\hsize by\tableindent \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil \leavevmode\unhbox0\par \endgroup % % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. \nobreak \vskip-\parskip % % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following % \baselineskip glue. \nobreak \endgroup \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse \else % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. Since that % text will be indented by \tableindent, we make the item text be in % a zero-width box. \noindent \rlap{\hskip -\tableindent\box0}\ignorespaces% \endgroup% \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue% \fi } \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}} \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}} \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}} \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}} \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}} \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}} %% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}} \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex} {\obeylines\obeyspaces% \gdef\tablex #1^^M{% \tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}} \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex} {\obeylines\obeyspaces% \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{% \tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% \let\Etable=\relax}} \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex} {\obeylines\obeyspaces% \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{% \tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% \let\Etable=\relax}} \def\dontindex #1{} \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}% \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}% {\obeyspaces % \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup% \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}} \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{% \aboveenvbreak % \begingroup % \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge. \let\itemindex=#1% \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi % \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi % \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi % \def\itemfont{#2}% \itemmax=\tableindent % \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % \advance \leftskip by \tableindent % \exdentamount=\tableindent \parindent = 0pt \parskip = \smallskipamount \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% \let\item = \internalBitem % \let\itemx = \internalBitemx % \let\kitem = \internalBkitem % \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx % \let\xitem = \internalBxitem % \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx % } % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize \newcount \itemno \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz} \def\itemizezzz #1{% \begingroup % ended by the @end itemsize \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize} } \def\itemizey #1#2{% \aboveenvbreak % \itemmax=\itemindent % \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % \advance \leftskip by \itemindent % \exdentamount=\itemindent \parindent = 0pt % \parskip = \smallskipamount % \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% \def\itemcontents{#1}% \let\item=\itemizeitem} % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. % These are `.?!:;,' \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000 \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 } % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. % \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No % argument is the same as `1'. % \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz} \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate % % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. \def\thearg{#1}% \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi % % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark \ifx\rest\empty % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and % not equal to itself. % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. % % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from % continuing to look for a . % \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) \else % It's a letter. \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter \else \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter \fi \fi \else % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. \numericenumerate \fi } % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is % given in \thearg. % \def\numericenumerate{% \itemno = \thearg \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% } % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. \def\lowercaseenumerate{% \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg \startenumeration{% % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. \ifnum\itemno=0 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger alphabet}% \fi \char\lccode\itemno }% } % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. \def\uppercaseenumerate{% \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg \startenumeration{% % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. \ifnum\itemno=0 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger alphabet} \fi \char\uccode\itemno }% } % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. % \def\startenumeration#1{% \advance\itemno by -1 \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr } % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg % to @enumerate. % \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} % Definition of @item while inside @itemize. \def\itemizeitem{% \advance\itemno by 1 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% \ifhmode \errmessage{\in hmode at itemizeitem}\fi {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}% \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% \flushcr} % @multitable macros % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 % % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. % To make preamble: % % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 % @item ... % % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many % columns as desired. % Or use a template: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} % @item ... % using the widest term desired in each column. % % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it % will parse correctly, i.e., % % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 % template} % Not: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} % {Column 3 template} % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are. % Sample multitable: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col % @item % first col stuff % @tab % second col stuff % @tab % third col % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. % % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. % @end multitable % Default dimensions may be reset by user. % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline % to baseline. % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. %%%% % Dimensions \newskip\multitableparskip \newskip\multitableparindent \newdimen\multitablecolspace \newskip\multitablelinespace \multitableparskip=0pt \multitableparindent=6pt \multitablecolspace=12pt \multitablelinespace=0pt %%%% % Macros used to set up halign preamble: \let\endsetuptable\relax \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} \let\columnfractions\relax \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} \newif\ifsetpercent %% 2/1/96, to allow fractions to be given with more than one digit. \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {\global\advance\colcount by1 % \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#1\hsize}% \setuptable} \newcount\colcount \def\setuptable#1{\def\firstarg{#1}% \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable\let\go\relax% \else \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions\global\setpercenttrue% \else \ifsetpercent \let\go\pickupwholefraction % In this case arg of setuptable % is the decimal point before the % number given in percent of hsize. % We don't need this so we don't use it. \else \global\advance\colcount by1 \setbox0=\hbox{#1 }% Add a normal word space as a separator; % typically that is always in the input, anyway. \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% \fi% \fi% \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction\else\let\go\setuptable\fi% \fi\go} %%%% % multitable syntax \def\tab{&\hskip1sp\relax} % 2/2/96 % tiny skip here makes sure this column space is % maintained, even if it is never used. %%%% % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable} \def\dotable#1{\bgroup \let\item\cr \tolerance=9500 \hbadness=9500 \setmultitablespacing \parskip=\multitableparskip \parindent=\multitableparindent \overfullrule=0pt \global\colcount=0\relax% \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\global\everycr{}\cr\egroup\egroup}% % To parse everything between @multitable and @item : \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable % Need to reset this to 0 after \setuptable. \global\colcount=0\relax% % % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will % be used as many times as user calls for columns. % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and % continue for many paragraphs if desired. \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax% \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after % the first one. % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace % to the width of each template entry. % If user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize % we will use that dimension as the width of the column, and % the \leftskip will keep entries from bumping into each other. % Table will start at left margin and final column will justify at % right margin. \ifnum\colcount=1 \else \ifsetpercent \else % If user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace \fi % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: \leftskip=\multitablecolspace \fi % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. % For example: % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 % @item @code{#} % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking % characters. \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one. % The table preamble % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width. \global\everycr{\noalign{% % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table % breaks over pages Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. \global\colcount=0\relax}} } \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace. % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on % current baselineskip. \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders, %% to keep lines equally spaced \let\multistrut = \strut %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of %% table. If not, do nothing. %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. \else \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0 width0pt\relax} \fi \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller %% than skip between lines in the table. \fi% \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller %% than skip between lines in the table. \fi} \message{indexing,} % Index generation facilities % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex. {\catcode`\@=11 \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}} % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. % It automatically defines \fooindex such that % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long % for the sake of vms. \def\newindex #1{ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex \noexpand\doindex {#1}} } % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. \def\newcodeindex #1{ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex \noexpand\docodeindex {#1}} } \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. \def\synindex #1 #2 {% \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex \noexpand\doindex {#2}}% } % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo % inside @code. \def\syncodeindex #1 #2 {% \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex \noexpand\docodeindex {#2}}% } % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, % and it is "foo", the name of the index. % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} \def\indexdummies{% % Take care of the plain tex accent commands. \def\"{\realbackslash "}% \def\`{\realbackslash `}% \def\'{\realbackslash '}% \def\^{\realbackslash ^}% \def\~{\realbackslash ~}% \def\={\realbackslash =}% \def\b{\realbackslash b}% \def\c{\realbackslash c}% \def\d{\realbackslash d}% \def\u{\realbackslash u}% \def\v{\realbackslash v}% \def\H{\realbackslash H}% % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}% \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}% \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}% \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}% \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}% \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}% \def\o{\realbackslash o}% \def\O{\realbackslash O}% \def\l{\realbackslash l}% \def\L{\realbackslash L}% \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}% % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry. % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to % laboriously list every single command here.) \def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char. %\let\{ = \lbracecmd %\let\} = \rbracecmd \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}% \def\w{\realbackslash w }% \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }% %\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }% \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }% \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}% \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}% \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}% \def\less{\realbackslash less}% \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}% %\def\char{\realbackslash char}% \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}% \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }% \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright }% \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}% \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}% \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}% \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}% \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}% \def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}% \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}% \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}% \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}% \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}% \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}% \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}% \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}% \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}% \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}% \unsepspaces } % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the % expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). {\obeyspaces \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}} % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands. % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by. \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1} \def\indexdummytex{TeX} \def\indexdummydots{...} \def\indexnofonts{% % Just ignore accents. \let\,=\indexdummyfont \let\"=\indexdummyfont \let\`=\indexdummyfont \let\'=\indexdummyfont \let\^=\indexdummyfont \let\~=\indexdummyfont \let\==\indexdummyfont \let\b=\indexdummyfont \let\c=\indexdummyfont \let\d=\indexdummyfont \let\u=\indexdummyfont \let\v=\indexdummyfont \let\H=\indexdummyfont \let\dotless=\indexdummyfont % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. \def\oe{oe}% \def\ae{ae}% \def\aa{aa}% \def\OE{OE}% \def\AE{AE}% \def\AA{AA}% \def\o{o}% \def\O{O}% \def\l{l}% \def\L{L}% \def\ss{ss}% \let\w=\indexdummyfont \let\t=\indexdummyfont \let\r=\indexdummyfont \let\i=\indexdummyfont \let\b=\indexdummyfont \let\emph=\indexdummyfont \let\strong=\indexdummyfont \let\cite=\indexdummyfont \let\sc=\indexdummyfont %Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |... %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont \let\tclose=\indexdummyfont \let\code=\indexdummyfont \let\file=\indexdummyfont \let\samp=\indexdummyfont \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont \let\key=\indexdummyfont \let\var=\indexdummyfont \let\TeX=\indexdummytex \let\dots=\indexdummydots \def\@{@}% } % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape. % We must first make another character (@) an escape % so we do not become unable to do a definition. {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. \let\SETmarginindex=\relax %initialize! % workhorse for all \fooindexes % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there \def\doind #1#2{% % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}% \fi {% \count255=\lastpenalty {% \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage \escapechar=`\\ {% \let\folio=0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio. \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. % % First process the index-string with all font commands turned off % to get the string to sort by. {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2}}% % % Now produce the complete index entry, with both the sort key and the % original text, including any font commands. \toks0 = {#2}% \edef\temp{% \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{% \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}% }% \temp }% }% \penalty\count255 }% } \def\dosubind #1#2#3{% {\count10=\lastpenalty % {\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage \escapechar=`\\% {\let\folio=0% \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% % % Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off, % to get the string to sort the index by. {\indexnofonts \xdef\temp1{#2 #3}% }% % Now produce the complete index entry. We process the index-string again, % this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index. \edef\temp{% \write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{% \realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}{#3}}}% \temp }% }\penalty\count10}} % The index entry written in the file actually looks like % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} % or % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files % containing these kinds of lines: % \initial {c} % before the first topic whose initial is c % \entry {topic}{pagelist} % for a topic that is used without subtopics % \primary {topic} % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} % for each subtopic. % Define the user-accessible indexing commands % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. \def\findex {\fnindex} \def\kindex {\kyindex} \def\cindex {\cpindex} \def\vindex {\vrindex} \def\tindex {\tpindex} \def\pindex {\pgindex} \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} {\obeylines % \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. % This is what you call to cause a particular index to get printed. % Write % @unnumbered Function Index % @printindex fn \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex} \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% % \indexfonts \rm \tolerance = 9500 \indexbreaks \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}% % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change % to make right now. \catcode`\\ = 0 \catcode`\@ = 11 \escapechar = `\\ \begindoublecolumns % % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. \openin 1 \jobname.#1s \ifeof 1 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure % there is some text. (Index is nonexistent) \else % % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so % it can discover if there is anything in it. \read 1 to \temp \ifeof 1 (Index is empty) \else \input \jobname.#1s \fi \fi \closein 1 \enddoublecolumns \endgroup} % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. % Change them to control the appearance of the index. % Same as \bigskipamount except no shrink. % \balancecolumns gets confused if there is any shrink. \newskip\initialskipamount \initialskipamount 12pt plus4pt \def\initial #1{% {\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt \ifdim\lastskip<\initialskipamount \removelastskip \penalty-200 \vskip \initialskipamount\fi \line{\secbf#1\hfill}\kern 2pt\penalty10000}} % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2 % flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents % entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. % \def\entry #1#2{\begingroup % % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't % affect previous text. \par % % Do not fill out the last line with white space. \parfillskip = 0in % % No extra space above this paragraph. \parskip = 0in % % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. \finalhyphendemerits = 0 % % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. % % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. \hangindent=2em % % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line % with blank space. \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil % % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking % parameters we've set above will have an effect. \noindent % % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it. #1% % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be % cursed by a Unix daemon. \def\tempa{{\rm }}% \def\tempb{#2}% \edef\tempc{\tempa}% \edef\tempd{\tempb}% \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else% % % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) \hfil\penalty50 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. % % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull % \hbox ensues. \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph. \fi% \par \endgroup} % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm \def\secondary #1#2{ {\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in \hangindent =1in \hangafter=1 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par }} % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. \catcode`\@=11 \newbox\partialpage \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns % Grab any single-column material above us. \output = {\global\setbox\partialpage =\vbox{\unvbox255\kern -\topskip \kern \baselineskip}}% \eject % % Now switch to the double-column output routine. \output={\doublecolumnout}% % % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the % execution time, so we may as well do it once. % % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +- < % 1pt) as it did when we hard-coded it. % % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) % been clobbered. % \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize % % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) \vsize = 2\vsize } \def\doublecolumnout{% \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the % previous page. \dimen@=\pageheight \advance\dimen@ by-\ht\partialpage % box0 will be the left-hand column, box1 the right. \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \onepageout\pagesofar \unvbox255 \penalty\outputpenalty } \def\pagesofar{% % The contents of the output page -- any previous material, % followed by the two boxes we just split. \unvbox\partialpage \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% } \def\enddoublecolumns{% \output={\balancecolumns}\eject % split what we have \endgroup % Back to normal single-column typesetting, but take account of the % fact that we just accumulated some stuff on the output page. \pagegoal=\vsize } \def\balancecolumns{% % Called on the last page of the double column material. \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox255}% \dimen@ = \ht0 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip \divide\dimen@ by 2 \splittopskip = \topskip % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. {\vbadness=10000 \loop \global\setbox3=\copy0 \global\setbox1=\vsplit3 to\dimen@ \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ \global\advance\dimen@ by1pt \repeat}% \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% \pagesofar } \catcode `\@=\other \message{sectioning,} % Define chapters, sections, etc. \newcount \chapno \newcount \secno \secno=0 \newcount \subsecno \subsecno=0 \newcount \subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... \newcount \appendixno \appendixno = `\@ \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} \newwrite \contentsfile % This is called from \setfilename. \def\opencontents{\openout \contentsfile = \jobname.toc} % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise \def\thischapter{} \def\thissection{} \def\seccheck#1{\if \pageno<0 % \errmessage{@#1 not allowed after generating table of contents}\fi % } \def\chapternofonts{% \let\rawbackslash=\relax% \let\frenchspacing=\relax% \def\result{\realbackslash result} \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv} \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion} \def\print{\realbackslash print} \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX} \def\dots{\realbackslash dots} \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright} \def\tt{\realbackslash tt} \def\bf{\realbackslash bf } \def\w{\realbackslash w} \def\less{\realbackslash less} \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr} \def\hat{\realbackslash hat} \def\char{\realbackslash char} \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}} \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}} \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}} \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}} \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}} \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}} \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}} \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}} % These are redefined because @smartitalic wouldn't work inside xdef. \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}} \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}} \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}} \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}} \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}} } \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name % Choose a numbered-heading macro % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections % #2 is text for heading \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 \ifcase\absseclevel \chapterzzz{#2} \or \seczzz{#2} \or \numberedsubseczzz{#2} \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} \else \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \chapterzzz{#2} \else \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} \fi \fi } % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 \ifcase\absseclevel \appendixzzz{#2} \or \appendixsectionzzz{#2} \or \appendixsubseczzz{#2} \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} \else \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \appendixzzz{#2} \else \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} \fi \fi } % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 \ifcase\absseclevel \unnumberedzzz{#2} \or \unnumberedseczzz{#2} \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2} \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} \else \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \unnumberedzzz{#2} \else \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} \fi \fi } \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title} \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy} \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz \def\chapterzzz #1{\seccheck{chapter}% \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter \the\chapno}% \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}% \gdef\thissection{#1}% \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry {#1}{\the\chapno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \donoderef % \global\let\section = \numberedsec \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec }} \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy} \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz \def\appendixzzz #1{\seccheck{appendix}% \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \appendixno by 1 \message{Appendix \appendixletter}% \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}% \gdef\thissection{#1}% \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \appendixnoderef % \global\let\section = \appendixsec \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec }} % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy} \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}} \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz \def\unnumberedzzz #1{\seccheck{unnumbered}% \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 % % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant % to be executed, not expanded). % % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use % \the to achieve this: TeX expands \the only once, % simply yielding the contents of the . \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}% % \unnumbchapmacro {#1}% \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry {#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \unnumbnoderef % \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec }} \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy} \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz \def\seczzz #1{\seccheck{section}% \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry % {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \donoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsection}% \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry % {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \appendixnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy} \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsec}% \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \unnumbnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy} \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsection}% \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry % {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \donoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy} \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsec}% \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry % {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \appendixnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy} \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsec}% \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \unnumbnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy} \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsubsection}% \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % \subsubsecheading {#1} {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry % {#1} {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno} {\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \donoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy} \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsubsec}% \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % \subsubsecheading {#1} {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{#1}% {\appendixletter} {\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \appendixnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy} \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsubsec}% \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \unnumbnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo. % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work. \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz} \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz} \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz} \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz} \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz} \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz} \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz} \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz} \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz} \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz} \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz} % These macros control what the section commands do, according % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. \global\let\section = \numberedsec \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and % such: % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit % overlong headings to fold. % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz} \def\majorheadingzzz #1{% {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz} \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak % {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. \def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading} \def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading} \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading} % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) \newskip\chapheadingskip \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} \def\CHAPPAGoff{ \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} \def\CHAPPAGon{ \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} \def\CHAPPAGodd{ \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} \CHAPPAGon \def\CHAPFplain{ \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain} % Plain chapter opening. % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered. \def\chfplain#1#2{% \pchapsepmacro {% \chapfonts \rm \def\chapnum{#2}% \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe \unhbox0 #1\par}% }% \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title \nobreak } % Plain opening for unnumbered. \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}} % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax \def\centerchfplain#1{{% \def\centerparametersmaybe{% \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip \leftskip = \rightskip \parfillskip = 0pt }% \chfplain{#1}{}% }} \CHAPFplain % The default \def\unnchfopen #1{% \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 % } \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% \par\penalty 5000 % } \def\centerchfopen #1{% \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 % } \def\CHAPFopen{ \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} % Section titles. \newskip\secheadingskip \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}} \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}} \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}} % Subsection titles. \newskip \subsecheadingskip \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}} \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}} \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}} % Subsubsection titles. \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}} \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}} % Print any size section title. % % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section % number (maybe empty), #3 the text. \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{% {% \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname }% {% % Switch to the right set of fonts. \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm % % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number. \def\secnum{#2}% \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% % \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number \unhbox0 #3}% }% \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak } \message{toc printing,} % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written % to \contentsfile. \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in \def\startcontents#1{% % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. % From: Torbjorn Granlund \contentsalignmacro \immediate\closeout \contentsfile \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = -1 % Request roman numbered pages. \fi % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. % It is abundantly clear what they are. \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}% \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 \catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. } % Normal (long) toc. \outer\def\contents{% \startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}% \input \jobname.toc \endgroup \vfill \eject } % And just the chapters. \outer\def\summarycontents{% \startcontents{\putwordShortContents}% % \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. \secfonts \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl \rm \hyphenpenalty = 10000 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{} \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{} \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{} \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{} \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} \input \jobname.toc \endgroup \vfill \eject } \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. % The first argument is the chapter or section name. % The last argument is the page number. % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... % Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents. \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}} % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{% \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}% } % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. % The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it. \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix } \newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0 \def\shortchaplabel#1{% % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned. \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}% \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi % % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}% } \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}} \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}} % Sections. \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}} \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}} % Subsections. \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}} \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}} % And subsubsections. \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{% \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}} \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}} % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the % page number. % % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. \def\dochapentry#1#2{% \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip \begingroup \chapentryfonts \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% \endgroup \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip } \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% \endgroup} \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% \endgroup} \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% \endgroup} % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.) % % \turnoffactive is for the sake of @" used for umlauts. \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks \entry{\turnoffactive #1}{\turnoffactive #2}% \endgroup} % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts \message{environments,} % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. % Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts. \newbox\dblarrowbox \newbox\longdblarrowbox \newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox \newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox %{\tentt %\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil} %\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil} %\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil} %\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil} % Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook) %\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex % depth .1ex\hfil} %} % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. \def\point{$\star$} \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. \vbox{ \hrule height\dimen2 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. \hrule height\dimen2} \hfil} % The @error{} command. \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. \def\tex{\begingroup \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie \catcode `\%=14 \catcode 43=12 % plus \catcode`\"=12 \catcode`\==12 \catcode`\|=12 \catcode`\<=12 \catcode`\>=12 \escapechar=`\\ % \let\,=\ptexcomma \let\{=\ptexlbrace \let\}=\ptexrbrace \let\.=\ptexdot \let\*=\ptexstar \let\dots=\ptexdots \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}} \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi} \def\@{@}% \let\bullet=\ptexbullet \let\b=\ptexb \let\c=\ptexc \let\i=\ptexi \let\t=\ptext % \let\Etex=\endgroup} % Define @lisp ... @endlisp. % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things, % including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous). % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't % have any width. \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input % should produce a line of output anyway. % {\obeyspaces % \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}} % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is % for use in \parsearg. {\sepspaces% \global\let\obeyedspace= } % This space is always present above and below environments. \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip % \def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip \endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount \removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}} \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. \let\nonarrowing=\relax %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % \cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around argument \font\circle=lcircle10 \newdimen\circthick \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle % \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr \hskip\rskip}} \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr \hskip\rskip}} % \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip \long\def\cartouche{% \begingroup \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*. \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip \advance\cartinner by-\rskip \cartouter=\hsize \advance\cartouter by 18pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either % side, and for 6pt waste from % each corner char \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. \let\nonarrowing=\comment \vbox\bgroup \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt \carttop \hbox\bgroup \hskip\lskip \vrule\kern3pt \vbox\bgroup \hsize=\cartinner \kern3pt \begingroup \baselineskip=\normbskip \lineskip=\normlskip \parskip=\normpskip \vskip -\parskip \def\Ecartouche{% \endgroup \kern3pt \egroup \kern3pt\vrule \hskip\rskip \egroup \cartbot \egroup \endgroup }} % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, % inside a group. \def\nonfillstart{% \aboveenvbreak \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. \singlespace \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output \parskip = 0pt \parindent = 0pt \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing % at next level down. \ifx\nonarrowing\relax \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing \let\exdent=\nofillexdent \let\nonarrowing=\relax \fi } % To ending an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph % (via \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we % keep the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue % will be inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the % document, after the environment. % \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% % This macro is \def\lisp{\begingroup \nonfillstart \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish \tt \rawbackslash % have \ input char produce \ char from current font \gobble } % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the % environment, so the error checking in \end will work. % % We must call \lisp last in the definition, since it reads the % return following the @example (or whatever) command. % \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} \def\smallexample{\begingroup \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} \def\smalllisp{\begingroup \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} % @smallexample and @smalllisp. This is not used unless the @smallbook % command is given. Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. % \def\smalllispx{\begingroup \nonfillstart \let\Esmalllisp = \nonfillfinish \let\Esmallexample = \nonfillfinish % % Smaller fonts for small examples. \indexfonts \tt \rawbackslash % make \ output the \ character from the current font (tt) \gobble } % This is @display; same as @lisp except use roman font. % \def\display{\begingroup \nonfillstart \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish \gobble } % This is @format; same as @display except don't narrow margins. % \def\format{\begingroup \let\nonarrowing = t \nonfillstart \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish \gobble } % @flushleft (same as @format) and @flushright. % \def\flushleft{\begingroup \let\nonarrowing = t \nonfillstart \let\Eflushleft = \nonfillfinish \gobble } \def\flushright{\begingroup \let\nonarrowing = t \nonfillstart \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill \gobble} % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) % and narrows the margins. % \def\quotation{% \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip \singlespace \parindent=0pt % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment... \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}% % % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. \ifx\nonarrowing\relax \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing \let\nonarrowing = \relax \fi } \message{defuns,} % Define formatter for defuns % First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname} \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt \newcount\parencount % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things. % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in. \def\activeparens{% \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active} % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm) % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 } \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} % This is used to turn on special parens % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active). \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr} % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions. % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses. \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested % \global\advance\parencount by 1 } % % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens. \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 } % \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0. % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (. \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi \global\advance \parencount by -1 } % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ } % \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr} } % End of definition inside \activeparens %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the %% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}} \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}} \def\ampnr{\&} \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}} % First, defname, which formats the header line itself. % #1 should be the function name. % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function". \def\defname #1#2{% % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were % outside the @def... \dimen2=\leftskip \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent \dimen3=\rightskip \advance\dimen3 by -\defbodyindent \noindent % \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}% \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 % % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin, % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins, % so that \rightline will obey them. \advance \hsize by -\dimen2 \advance \hsize by -\dimen3 \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}}}% % Make all lines underfull and no complaints: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent {\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name } % Actually process the body of a definition % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun. % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx. % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header, % such as \defunheader. \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup % \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `=' \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3} \def\defmethparsebody #1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV % \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}} \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones % except that they do not make parens into active characters. % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments. \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup % \catcode 61=\active % \obeylines\spacesplit#3} % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals. % \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{% \begingroup\inENV % \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup\obeylines } \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {% \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% \spacesplit{#3{#4}}% } % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh. % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody % % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and % won't strip off the braces. % \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {% \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty } % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the % braces (if any). That's what this does. % \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1} % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3 % (which might be empty) the arguments. % \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{% #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}% }% \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} % Split up #2 at the first space token. % call #1 with two arguments: % the first is all of #2 before the space token, % the second is all of #2 after that space token. % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg % and the second is passed as empty. {\obeylines \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}% \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{% \ifx\relax #3% #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}} % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions. % Define @defun. % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up \def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. \hyphenchar\tensl=0 #1% \hyphenchar\tensl=45 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{unbalanced parens in @def arguments}\fi% \interlinepenalty=10000 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000% } \def\deftypefunargs #1{% % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special. \boldbraxnoamp \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars \interlinepenalty=10000 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000% } % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed. % @deffn Command forward-char nchars \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader} \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % @defun == @deffn Function \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader} \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index \begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}% \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader} % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args. \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax} % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args. \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{% \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Function}% \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader} % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$ % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null. \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi} % #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args. \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax} % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args. \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{% \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index \begingroup \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents % at least some C++ text from working \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}% \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % @defmac == @deffn Macro \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader} \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index \begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}% \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % @defspec == @deffn Special Form \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader} \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index \begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}% \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % This definition is run if you use @defunx % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx. \def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}} \def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}} \def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}} \def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}} \def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}} \def\deftypeunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypeunx in invalid context}} % @defmethod, and so on % @defop {Funny Method} foo-class frobnicate argument \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}% \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype} \def\defopheader #1#2#3{% \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% Make entry in function index \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}% \defunargs {#3}\endgroup % } % @defmethod == @defop Method \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader} \def\defmethodheader #1#2#3{% \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% entry in function index \begingroup\defname {#2}{Method on #1}% \defunargs {#3}\endgroup % } % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}% \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype} \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{% \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}% \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % } % @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable} \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader} \def\defivarheader #1#2#3{% \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index \begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}% \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % } % These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc., % anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc. \def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}} \def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}} \def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}} \def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}} % Now @defvar % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar. % This is actually simple: just print them in roman. % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1% \interlinepenalty=10000 \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000} % @defvr Counter foo-count \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader} \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup} % @defvar == @defvr Variable \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader} \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index \begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}% \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % } % @defopt == @defvr {User Option} \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader} \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index \begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}% \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % } % @deftypevar int foobar \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader} % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index. \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{% \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}% \interlinepenalty=10000 \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000 \endgroup} \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}} % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader} \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax% \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1} \interlinepenalty=10000 \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000 \endgroup} % This definition is run if you use @defvarx % anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx. \def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}} \def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}} \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}} \def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}} \def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}} % Now define @deftp % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar. \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}} % @deftp Class window height width ... \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader} \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}% \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup} % This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc % anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc. \def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}} \message{cross reference,} % Define cross-reference macros \newwrite \auxfile \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. % @inforef is simple. \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} % \setref{foo} defines a cross-reference point named foo. \def\setref#1{% \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% \dosetq{#1-snt}{Ysectionnumberandtype}} \def\unnumbsetref#1{% \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% \dosetq{#1-snt}{Ynothing}} \def\appendixsetref#1{% \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% \dosetq{#1-snt}{Yappendixletterandtype}} % \xref, \pxref, and \ref generate cross-references to specified points. % For \xrefX, #1 is the node name, #2 the name of the Info % cross-reference, #3 the printed node name, #4 the name of the Info % file, #5 the name of the printed manual. All but the node name can be % omitted. % \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}% \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}% \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}% \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt % No printed node name was explicitly given. \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax % Use the node name inside the square brackets. \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% \else % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. \ifdim \wd1>0pt% % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% \else \ifhavexrefs % We know the real title if we have the xref values. \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}% \else % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% \fi% \fi \fi \fi % % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}% \else % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. {\turnoffactive \refx{#1-snt}{}}% \space [\printednodename],\space \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% \fi \endgroup} % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros % Use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore % work in node names. \def\dosetq #1#2{{\let\folio=0 \turnoffactive \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq {#1}{#2}}}% \next}} % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...} % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}} % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq \def\Ypagenumber{\folio} \def\Ytitle{\thissection} \def\Ynothing{} \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{% \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno % \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno % \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % \else % \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % \fi \fi \fi } \def\Yappendixletterandtype{% \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}% \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno % \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % \else % \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % \fi \fi \fi } \gdef\xreftie{'tie} % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. % \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0. \else \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space} \fi % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. \def\refx#1#2{% \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax % If not defined, say something at least. $\langle$un\-de\-fined$\rangle$% \ifhavexrefs \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% \else \ifwarnedxrefs\else \global\warnedxrefstrue \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% \fi \fi \else % It's defined, so just use it. \csname X#1\endcsname \fi #2% Output the suffix in any case. } % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. \def\xrdef #1#2{{% \catcode`\'=\other \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname{#2}% }} % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. \def\readauxfile{\begingroup \catcode`\^^@=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\^^C=\other \catcode`\^^D=\other \catcode`\^^E=\other \catcode`\^^F=\other \catcode`\^^G=\other \catcode`\^^H=\other \catcode`\ =\other \catcode`\^^L=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode`\=\other \catcode26=\other \catcode`\^^[=\other \catcode`\^^\=\other \catcode`\^^]=\other \catcode`\^^^=\other \catcode`\^^_=\other \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\^=\other % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. % % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. % \catcode`\~=\other \catcode`\[=\other \catcode`\]=\other \catcode`\"=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\|=\other \catcode`\<=\other \catcode`\>=\other \catcode`\$=\other \catcode`\#=\other \catcode`\&=\other % `\+ does not work, so use 43. \catcode43=\other % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters {% \count 1=128 \def\loop{% \catcode\count 1=\other \advance\count 1 by 1 \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi }% }% % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now). % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names. % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^ % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish, % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in. \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\%=\other \catcode`\'=0 \catcode`\\=\other % \openin 1 \jobname.aux \ifeof 1 \else \closein 1 \input \jobname.aux \global\havexrefstrue \global\warnedobstrue \fi % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux \endgroup} % Footnotes. \newcount \footnoteno % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.. \let\footnotestyle=\comment \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote {\catcode `\@=11 % % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. \gdef\footnote{% \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% % % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. \let\@sf\empty \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi % % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. \unskip \thisfootno\@sf \footnotezzz }% % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. % % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. % \long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. % So reset some parameters. \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \parindent\defaultparindent % % Hang the footnote text off the number. \hang \textindent{\thisfootno}% % % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. \footstrut \futurelet\next\fo@t } \def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next} \def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next} \def\f@t#1{#1\@foot} \def\@foot{\strut\egroup} }%end \catcode `\@=11 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. % \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} % \def\setleading#1{% \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip \normalbaselines \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip }% } % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). % \def\|{% % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. \leavevmode % % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. \vadjust{% % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. \vskip-\baselineskip % % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. \llap{% % % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt % % This is the space between the bar and the text. \hskip 12pt }% }% } % For a final copy, take out the rectangles % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). % \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} % End of control word definitions. \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} \def\openindices{% \newindex{cp}% \newcodeindex{fn}% \newcodeindex{vr}% \newcodeindex{tp}% \newcodeindex{ky}% \newcodeindex{pg}% } % Set some numeric style parameters, for 8.5 x 11 format. \hsize = 6in \hoffset = .25in \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt \parindent = \defaultparindent \parskip 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt \setleading{13.2pt} \advance\topskip by 1.2cm \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. \vbadness=10000 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. \widowpenalty=10000 \clubpenalty=10000 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on % \hsize. This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format. % \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% \else \emergencystretch = \hsize \divide\emergencystretch by 45 \fi % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 format (or else 7x9.25) \def\smallbook{ \global\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt \global\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt \global\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % \global\lispnarrowing = 0.3in \setleading{12pt} \advance\topskip by -1cm \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt \global\hsize = 5in \global\vsize=7.5in \global\tolerance=700 \global\hfuzz=1pt \global\contentsrightmargin=0pt \global\deftypemargin=0pt \global\defbodyindent=.5cm % \global\pagewidth=\hsize \global\pageheight=\vsize % \global\let\smalllisp=\smalllispx \global\let\smallexample=\smalllispx \global\def\Esmallexample{\Esmalllisp} } % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. \def\afourpaper{ \global\tolerance=700 \global\hfuzz=1pt \setleading{12pt} \global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt \global\vsize= 53\baselineskip \advance\vsize by \topskip %\global\hsize= 5.85in % A4 wide 10pt \global\hsize= 6.5in \global\outerhsize=\hsize \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in \global\outervsize=\vsize \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in \global\pagewidth=\hsize \global\pageheight=\vsize } \bindingoffset=0pt \normaloffset=\hoffset \pagewidth=\hsize \pageheight=\vsize % Allow control of the text dimensions. Parameters in order: textheight; % textwidth; voffset; hoffset; binding offset; topskip. % All require a dimension; % header is additional; added length extends the bottom of the page. \def\changepagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{ \global\vsize= #1 \global\topskip= #6 \advance\vsize by \topskip \global\voffset= #3 \global\hsize= #2 \global\outerhsize=\hsize \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in \global\outervsize=\vsize \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in \global\pagewidth=\hsize \global\pageheight=\vsize \global\normaloffset= #4 \global\bindingoffset= #5} % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm. \def\afourlatex {\global\tolerance=700 \global\hfuzz=1pt \setleading{12pt} \global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt \advance\baselineskip by 1.6pt \changepagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm} } % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format. \def\afourwide{\afourpaper \changepagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}} % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. \catcode`\"=\other \catcode`\~=\other \catcode`\^=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\|=\other \catcode`\<=\other \catcode`\>=\other \catcode`\+=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} \def\normaltilde{~} \def\normalcaret{^} \def\normalunderscore{_} \def\normalverticalbar{|} \def\normalless{<} \def\normalgreater{>} \def\normalplus{+} % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts, % where something hairier probably needs to be done. % % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. % \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} % Turn off all special characters except @ % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. \catcode`\"=\active \def\activedoublequote{{\tt \char '042}} \let"=\activedoublequote \catcode`\~=\active \def~{{\tt \char '176}} \chardef\hat=`\^ \catcode`\^=\active \def^{{\tt \hat}} \catcode`\_=\active \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} % Subroutine for the previous macro. \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}} \catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt \char '174}} \chardef \less=`\< \catcode`\<=\active \def<{{\tt \less}} \chardef \gtr=`\> \catcode`\>=\active \def>{{\tt \gtr}} \catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} %\catcode 27=\active %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$} % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time. {\catcode`\==\active \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}} \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} \catcode`\@=0 % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\ %{\catcode`\\=\other %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}} % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx. {\catcode`\\=\active @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }} % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}} % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. \escapechar=`\@ % \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q \catcode`\\=\active % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters % even after parsing them. @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote @let\=@realbackslash @let~=@normaltilde @let^=@normalcaret @let_=@normalunderscore @let|=@normalverticalbar @let<=@normalless @let>=@normalgreater @let+=@normalplus} @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote @let\=@normalbackslash @let~=@normaltilde @let^=@normalcaret @let_=@normalunderscore @let|=@normalverticalbar @let<=@normalless @let>=@normalgreater @let+=@normalplus} % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. @otherifyactive % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing % a backslash. % @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} @global@let\ = @eatinput % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. % @gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active} %% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. The @rm below %% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10 @catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other @textfonts @rm @c Local variables: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" @c End: cronolog-1.6.2/doc/cronolog.texi0000644000031100003110000000734106324757204012303 \input texinfo @c -*- Texinfo -*- @finalout @setfilename cronolog.info @c @c This file documents cronolog - program for rotating web server logs @c @c Copyright (C) 1997 Ford & Mason Ltd. @c @c This text may be freely distributed under the terms of the GNU @c General Public License. @c @ifinfo @format START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY * Cronolog: (cronolog). A log file rotation program for web servers END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY @end format @end ifinfo @setchapternewpage odd @settitle Cronolog @titlepage @title Cronolog @subtitle A log file rotation program for web servers @sp 1 @subtitle April 1997 @author Andrew Ford @page @tex {\parskip=0pt \hfill Ford \& Mason Ltd} @end tex @vskip 0pt plus 1filll Copyright @copyright{} 1997 Ford @& Mason Ltd Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. @noindent Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. @end titlepage @ifinfo Copyright @copyright{} 1997 Ford & Mason Ltd. Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. @ignore Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the results, provided the printed document carries a copying permission notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). @end ignore Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. @node Top, Overview, (dir), (dir) @top Cronolog Cronolog is a log file rotation program for web servers. This file describes version 1.3 of cronolog. @menu * Overview:: What is Cronolog? * How Cronolog works:: How Cronolog works * Support utilities:: Suport utilities * Index:: Index @end menu @end ifinfo @iftex @raggedbottom @end iftex @node Overview, How Cronolog works, Top, Top @chapter What is Cronolog? @cindex overview Cronolog is a log file rotation program for web servers. @node How Cronolog works, Support utilities, Overview, Top @chapter How Cronolog works When Cronolog starts up it examines the log file template specified on the command line and determines the periodicity of the log files, i.e. how often the log file should be rotated. It does this by looking for date format directives within the template and recording which directive specifies the smallest unit of time. When a log file is opened, Cronolog calculates the earliest time at which a new log file should be written. @node Support utilities, Index, How Cronolog works, Top @chapter Support utilities If you have not been rotating your log files or you have used another mechanism for rotating log files, you may want to split your existing log files according to the template you are using for Cronolog. A simple perl script called @code{split-logs-by-timestamp} is provided to do just that. @node Index, , Support utilities, Top @unnumbered Index @printindex cp @contents @bye cronolog-1.6.2/doc/cronolog.1m0000644000031100003110000001724507274466007011656 .\" -*- nroff -*- .\" $Id: cronolog.1m,v 1.5 1999/12/20 09:03:50 andrew Exp $ .\" Copyright (c) 1999 Apache Software Foundation .\" Copyright (c) 1996-1999 Andrew Ford and Ford & Mason Ltd. .\" The file License specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution. .TH cronolog 1m "March 1998" .SH NAME cronolog \- write log messages to log files named according to a template .SH SYNOPSIS cronolog [\fIOPTION\fR]... \fItemplate\fR .SH DESCRIPTION .B cronolog is a simple program that reads log messages from its input and writes them to a set of output files, the names of which are constructed using .B template and the current date and time. The template uses the same format specifiers as the Unix .BR date (1) command (which are the same as the standard C strftime library function). .PP Before writing a message .B cronolog checks the time to see whether the current log file is still valid and if not it closes the current file, expands the template using the current date and time to generate a new file name, opens the new file (creating missing directories on the path of the new log file as needed unless the program is compiled with -DDONT_CREATE_SUBDIRS) and calculates the time at which the new file will become invalid. .PP .B cronolog is intended to be used in conjunction with a Web server, such as Apache to split the access log into daily or monthly logs. For example the Apache configuration directives: .LP TransferLog "|/www/sbin/cronolog /www/logs/%Y/%m/%d/access.log" ErrorLog "|/www/sbin/cronolog /www/logs/%Y/%m/%d/errors.log" .LP would instruct Apache to pipe its access and error log messages into separate copies of cronolog, which would create new log files each day in a directory hierarchy structured by date, i.e. on 31 December 1996 messages would be written to .LP /www/logs/1996/12/31/access.log /www/logs/1996/12/31/errors.log .P after midnight the files .LP /www/logs/1997/01/01/access.log /www/logs/1997/01/01/errors.log .P would be used, with the directories 1997, 1997/01 and 1997/01/01 being created if they did not already exist. (Note that prior to version 1.2 Apache did not allow a program to be specified as the argument of the ErrorLog directive.) .SH Options .C cronolog accepts the following options and arguments: .\" .IP "-H \fINAME\fP" .IP "--hardlink=\fINAME\fP" maintain a hard link from .I NAME to the current log file. .\" .IP "-S \fINAME\fP" .IP "--symlink=\fINAME\fP" .IP "-l \fINAME\fP" .IP "--link=\fINAME\fP" maintain a symbolic link from .I NAME to the current log file. .\" .IP "-P \fINAME\fP" .IP "--prevlink=\fINAME\fP" maintain a symbolic link from .I NAME to the previous log file. Requires that the .B "--symlink" option is specified, as cronolog renames the current link to the name specified for the previous link. .\" .IP -h .IP --help print a help message and then exit. .\" .IP "-p \fIPERIOD\fP" .IP "--period=\fIPERIOD\fP" specifies the period explicitly as an optional digit string followed by one of units: \fBseconds\fP, \fBminutes\fP, \fBhours\fP, \fBdays\fP, \fBweeks\fP or \fBmonths\fP. The count cannot be greater than the number of units in the next larger unit, i.e. you cannot specify "120 minutes", and for seconds, minutes and hours the count must be a factor of the next higher unit, i.e you can specify 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes but not say 7 minutes. .\" .IP "-d \fIPERIOD\fP" .IP "--delay=\fIPERIOD\fP" specifies the delay from the start of the period before the log file is rolled over. For example specifying (explicitly or implicitly) a period of 15 minutes and a delay of 5 minutes results in the log files being rotated at five past, twenty past, twentyfive to and ten to each hour. The delay cannot be longer than the period. .\" .IP "-o" .IP "--once-only" create single output log from template, which is not rotated. .\" .IP "-x FILE" .IP "--debug=\fIFILE\fP" write debug messages to .I FILE or to the standard error stream if .I FILE is "-". (See the README file for more details.) .\" .IP "-s TIME" .IP "--start-time=\fITIME\fP" pretend that the starting time is .I TIME (for debugging purposes). .I TIME should be something like "DD MONTH YYYY HH:MM:SS" (the day and month are reversed if the american option is specified). If the seconds are omitted then they are taken as zero and if the hours and minutes are omitted then the time of day is taken as 00:00:00 (i.e. midnight). The day, month and year can be separated by spaces, hyphens (-) or solidi (/). .\" .IP -a .IP --american Interprete the date part of the starting time the American way (month then day). .IP -e .IP --european Interprete the date part of the starting time the European way (day then month). This is the default. .\" .IP -v .IP --version print version information and exit. .\" .\" .\" .IP "-p \fIprogram\fP" .\" postprocess each logfile using program once a new logfile is created. .\" \fIprogram\fP is invoked with the name of the previous logfile as its .\" argument. .\" .\" .SH Template format Each character in the template represents a character in the expanded filename, except for date and time format specifiers, which are replaced by their expansion. Format specifiers consist of a `%' followed by one of the following characters: .IP % a literal % character .IP n a new-line character .IP t a horizontal tab character .PP Time fields: .IP H hour (00..23) .IP I hour (01..12) .IP p the locale's AM or PM indicator .IP M minute (00..59) .IP S second (00..61, which allows for leap seconds) .IP X the locale's time representation (e.g.: "15:12:47") .IP Z time zone (e.g. GMT), or nothing if the time zone cannot be determined .PP Date fields: .IP a the locale's abbreviated weekday name (e.g.: Sun..Sat) .IP A the locale's full weekday name (e.g.: Sunday .. Saturday) .IP b the locale's abbreviated month name (e.g.: Jan .. Dec) .IP B the locale's full month name, (e.g.: January .. December) .IP c the locale's date and time (e.g.: "Sun Dec 15 14:12:47 GMT 1996") .IP d day of month (01 .. 31) .IP j day of year (001 .. 366) .IP m month (01 .. 12) .IP U week of the year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53, where week 1 is the week containing the first Sunday of the year) .IP W week of the year with Monday as first day of week (00..53, where week 1 is the week containing the first Monday of the year) .IP w day of week (0 .. 6, where 0 corresponds to Sunday) .IP x locale's date representation (e.g. today in April in Britain: "13/04/97") .IP y year without the century (00 .. 99) .IP Y year with the century (1970 .. 2038) .P Other specifiers may be available depending on the C library's implementation of the .B strftime function. .P .SH SEE ALSO .BR apache (1m) .BR date (1) .BR strftime (3) .BR environ (5) .PP More information and the latest version of .B cronolog can be obtained from .LP http://www.ford-mason.co.uk/resources/cronolog/ .LP If you have any suggestions, bug reports, fixes, or enhancements, please mail them to the author. .SS More about Apache Documentation for the Apache http server is available from .LP http://www.apache.org .\" .SH FUTURE DIRECTIONS The functionality of .B cronolog could be built into Apache, thus saving the overhead of having a process per log stream and that of transferring data from the server process to the cronolog process. The main complication is handling the case where multiple log streams are written to the same file (template), for example where different virtual servers write to the same set of log files. .SH AUTHOR Andrew Ford .LP .B cronolog is based on a program called .B rotatelogs by Ben Laurie, which is packaged with the Apache web server. .LP The symbolic link .\" and postprocessing options were option was suggested by Juergen Lesny. cronolog-1.6.2/doc/cronosplit.1m0000644000031100003110000000711307027370366012217 .\" -*- nroff -*- .\" $Id: cronosplit.1m,v 1.4 1999/12/20 09:03:50 andrew Exp $ .\" Copyright (c) 1999 Apache Software Foundation .\" Copyright (c) 1997-1999 Andrew Ford and Ford & Mason Ltd. .\" The file License specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution. .\" .TH cronosplit 1m "March 1998" .\" .SH NAME cronosplit \- split log files into cronolog-compatible files .\" .SH SYNOPSIS .B cronosplit --template=TEMPLATE [--print-invalid] [--help] [--version] file ... .\" .SH DESCRIPTION .B cronosplit is a simple program that reads lines from a set of input log files, which must be in .I "Common Log Format" and write each lines to an output files, the name of which is constructed using the .B template specified and timestamp from the the line. The template uses the same format specifiers as the Unix .BR date (1) command (which are the same as the standard C strftime library function). .\" .SH Options .C cronosplit accepts the following options and arguments: .IP "--template=\fITEMPLATE\fP" specifies the template for the output log files (using the format specifiers described below). .IP "--verbose" print additional status messages to the standard error stream. .IP "--debug" print debug messages to the standard error stream. .IP "--help" print a help message and then exit. .IP "--version" print version information and exit. .\" .SH Template format Each character in the template represents a character in the expanded filename, except for date and time format specifiers, which are replaced by their expansion. Format specifiers consist of a `%' followed by one of the following characters: .IP % a literal % character .IP n a new-line character .IP t a horizontal tab character .PP Time fields: .IP H hour (00..23) .IP I hour (01..12) .IP p the locale's AM or PM indicator .IP M minute (00..59) .IP S second (00..61, which allows for leap seconds) .IP X the locale's time representation (e.g.: "15:12:47") .IP Z time zone (e.g. GMT), or nothing if the time zone cannot be determined .PP Date fields: .IP a the locale's abbreviated weekday name (e.g.: Sun..Sat) .IP A the locale's full weekday name (e.g.: Sunday .. Saturday) .IP b the locale's abbreviated month name (e.g.: Jan .. Dec) .IP B the locale's full month name, (e.g.: January .. December) .IP c the locale's date and time (e.g.: "Sun Dec 15 14:12:47 GMT 1996") .IP d day of month (01 .. 31) .IP j day of year (001 .. 366) .IP m month (01 .. 12) .IP U week of the year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53, where week 1 is the week containing the first Sunday of the year) .IP W week of the year with Monday as first day of week (00..53, where week 1 is the week containing the first Monday of the year) .IP w day of week (0 .. 6, where 0 corresponds to Sunday) .IP x locale's date representation (e.g. today in Britain: "12/04/96") .IP y year without the century (00 .. 99) .IP Y year with the century (1970 .. 2038) .P Other specifiers may be available depending on the C library's implementation of the .B strftime function. .P .SH SEE ALSO .BR apache (1m) .BR cronolog (1m) .BR date (1) .BR strftime (3) .BR environ (5) .PP More information and the latest version of .B cronolog and .B cronosplit can be obtained from .LP http://www.ford-mason.co.uk/resources/cronolog/ .LP If you have any suggestions, bug reports, fixes, or enhancements, please mail them to the author. .SS More about Apache Documentation for the Apache http server is available from .LP http://www.apache.org .SH AUTHOR Andrew Ford .LP .B cronosplit is based on a script called .B splitlog by Roy Fielding, which is part of the .B wwwstat package. cronolog-1.6.2/doc/cronolog.info0000644000031100003110000000523306324757435012271 This is Info file cronolog.info, produced by Makeinfo-1.63 from the input file cronolog.texi. START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY * Cronolog: (cronolog). A log file rotation program for web servers END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY Copyright (C) 1997 Ford & Mason Ltd. Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.  File: cronolog.info, Node: Top, Next: Overview, Prev: (dir), Up: (dir) Cronolog ******** Cronolog is a log file rotation program for web servers. This file describes version 1.3 of cronolog. * Menu: * Overview:: What is Cronolog? * How Cronolog works:: How Cronolog works * Support utilities:: Suport utilities * Index:: Index  File: cronolog.info, Node: Overview, Next: How Cronolog works, Prev: Top, Up: Top What is Cronolog? ***************** Cronolog is a log file rotation program for web servers.  File: cronolog.info, Node: How Cronolog works, Next: Support utilities, Prev: Overview, Up: Top How Cronolog works ****************** When Cronolog starts up it examines the log file template specified on the command line and determines the periodicity of the log files, i.e. how often the log file should be rotated. It does this by looking for date format directives within the template and recording which directive specifies the smallest unit of time. When a log file is opened, Cronolog calculates the earliest time at which a new log file should be written.  File: cronolog.info, Node: Support utilities, Next: Index, Prev: How Cronolog works, Up: Top Support utilities ***************** If you have not been rotating your log files or you have used another mechanism for rotating log files, you may want to split your existing log files according to the template you are using for Cronolog. A simple perl script called `split-logs-by-timestamp' is provided to do just that.  File: cronolog.info, Node: Index, Prev: Support utilities, Up: Top Index ***** * Menu: * overview: Overview.  Tag Table: Node: Top827 Node: Overview1232 Node: How Cronolog works1419 Node: Support utilities2000 Node: Index2429  End Tag Table cronolog-1.6.2/testsuite/0000777000031100003110000000000007274470016011127 5cronolog-1.6.2/testsuite/Makefile.in0000664000031100003110000001011507274470016013110 # Makefile.in generated automatically by automake 1.4 from Makefile.am # Copyright (C) 1994, 1995-8, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without # even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A # PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SHELL = @SHELL@ srcdir = @srcdir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ prefix = @prefix@ exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ bindir = @bindir@ sbindir = @sbindir@ libexecdir = @libexecdir@ datadir = @datadir@ sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ localstatedir = @localstatedir@ libdir = @libdir@ infodir = @infodir@ mandir = @mandir@ includedir = @includedir@ oldincludedir = /usr/include DESTDIR = pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ top_builddir = .. ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ INSTALL = @INSTALL@ INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ $(AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS) INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ transform = @program_transform_name@ NORMAL_INSTALL = : PRE_INSTALL = : POST_INSTALL = : NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : PRE_UNINSTALL = : POST_UNINSTALL = : CC = @CC@ LN_S = @LN_S@ MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ PERL = @PERL@ RANLIB = @RANLIB@ VERSION = @VERSION@ mkinstalldirs = $(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = DIST_COMMON = README Makefile.am Makefile.in DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) TAR = gtar GZIP_ENV = --best all: all-redirect .SUFFIXES: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in: Makefile.am $(top_srcdir)/configure.in $(ACLOCAL_M4) cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu --include-deps testsuite/Makefile Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status cd $(top_builddir) \ && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status tags: TAGS TAGS: distdir = $(top_builddir)/$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir) subdir = testsuite distdir: $(DISTFILES) @for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ d=$(srcdir); \ if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ cp -pr $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file; \ else \ test -f $(distdir)/$$file \ || ln $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file 2> /dev/null \ || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file || :; \ fi; \ done info-am: info: info-am dvi-am: dvi: dvi-am check-am: all-am check: check-am installcheck-am: installcheck: installcheck-am install-exec-am: install-exec: install-exec-am install-data-am: install-data: install-data-am install-am: all-am @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am install: install-am uninstall-am: uninstall: uninstall-am all-am: Makefile all-redirect: all-am install-strip: $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS=-s install installdirs: mostlyclean-generic: clean-generic: distclean-generic: -rm -f Makefile $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) -rm -f config.cache config.log stamp-h stamp-h[0-9]* maintainer-clean-generic: mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am clean-am: clean-generic mostlyclean-am clean: clean-am distclean-am: distclean-generic clean-am distclean: distclean-am maintainer-clean-am: maintainer-clean-generic distclean-am @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am .PHONY: tags distdir info-am info dvi-am dvi check check-am \ installcheck-am installcheck install-exec-am install-exec \ install-data-am install-data install-am install uninstall-am uninstall \ all-redirect all-am all installdirs mostlyclean-generic \ distclean-generic clean-generic maintainer-clean-generic clean \ mostlyclean distclean maintainer-clean # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: cronolog-1.6.2/testsuite/README0000644000031100003110000000052006500477304011716 Test suite for cronolog ======================= The test suite checks * the functionality of the cronolog utility functions * that log files are created in the correct directories * that changes to daylight saving time are acted on correctly * that the year 2000 poses no problems Unfortunately the testsuite is not yet written ;-) cronolog-1.6.2/testsuite/Makefile.am0000644000031100003110000000007206323653372013100 ## Process this file with automake to create Makefile.in